NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

NATOPS PARTIAL FLIGHT MANUAL

NAVY MODEL EP-3J

AIRCRAFT THIS PUBLICATION IS INCOMPLETE WITHOUT NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 AND

NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-3.1.

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C - Distribution authorized to U.S. Government agencies and their contractors to protect publications required for official use or for administrative or operational purposes only (1 October 1997). Other requests for this document shall be referred to Commanding Officer, Naval Air Technical Services Facility, Defense Distribution Depot Susquehanna Pennsylvania, Bldg. 05, 5450 Carlisle Pike, Mechanicsburg, PA 17055-0789.

DESTRUCTION NOTICE - For unclassified, limited documents, destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document.

ISSUED BY AUTHORITY OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS AND UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE

1 COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR SYSTEMS COMMAND

I (Reverse Blank) 1 OCTOBER 1997 0801LP0163970

NATEC ELECTRONIC MANUAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-4.3

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS

2000 NAVY PENTAGON WASHINGTON, D.C. 20350-2000

1 October 1997

LETTER OF PROMULGATION

1. Tbe Naval Air Training and Operating Procedures Standardization (NATOPS) Program is a positive approach toward improving combat readiness and achieving a substantial reduction in the aircraft mishap rate. Standardization, based on professional knowledge and experience, provides the basis for development of an efficient and sound operational procedure. The standardization program is not planned to stifle individual initiative, but rather to aid the commanding officer in increasing the unit’s combat potential without reducing command prestige or responsibility.

2. This manual standardizes ground and flight procedures but does not include tactical doctrine. Compliance with the stipulated manual requirements and procedures is mandatory except as authorized herein. In order to remain effective, NATOPS must be dynamic and stimulate rather than suppress individual thinking. Since aviation is a continuing, progressive profession, it is both desirable and necessary that new ideas and new techniques be expeditiously evaluated and incorporated if proven to be sound. To this end, commanding officers of aviation units are authorized to modify procedures contained herein, in accordance with the waiver provisions established by OPNAVINST 3710.7, for the purpose of assessing new ideas prior to initiating recommendations for permanent changes. This manual is prepared and kept current by the users in order to achieve maximum readiness and safety in the most efficient and economical manner. Should conflict exist between the training and operating procedures found in this manual and those found in other publications, this manual will govern.

3. Checklists and other pertinent extracts from this publication necessary to normal operations and training should be made and carried for use in naval aircraft.

DENNIS V. McGINN Rear Admiral, U.S. Navy Director, Air Warfare

3 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

I INTERIM CHANGE SUMMARY

The following Interim Changes have been canceled or previously incorporated in this manual:

INTERIM CHANGE REMARKS/PURPOSE

NUMBER(S)

Thefollowing Interim Changes have been incorporated in this Change/Revision:

INTERIM CHANGE REMARKS/PURPOSE

NUMBER(S)

Interim Changes Outstanding - To be maintained by the custodian of this manual:

INTERIM CHANGE NUMBER

ORIGINATOR/DATE PAGES (or DATEfrIME GROUP) AFFECTED REMARKS/PURPOSE


NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

SUMMARY OF APPLICABLE TECHNICAL DIRECTIVES Information relating to the following recent technical directives bar been incorporated in this manual.

CHANGE NUMBER

DESCRlPllON DATE INC. VlSUAL IN MANUAL IDENllFlCATlON

Information relating to the following applicable technical directives will be incorporated in afihrre change.

CHANGE NUMBER

DESCRlPTlON VlBUAL IDENTIFICATION


NAVAIR @I-75PAA-1.3

RECORD OF CHANGES

9 (Reverse Blankl ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

EP-3J Aircraft Natops Flight Manual

Contents

PART I - AIRCRAFT

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1 THE AIRCRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-l 1.1.1 Mission Equipment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-I

CHAPTER 2 - SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT

2.14 MISSION SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l

2.15 PRIMARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l

2.16 MISSION CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-l

2.11 400/60 HZ CONVERTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2

CHAPTER 3 -SERVICING

3.4.10 Pod Radiation Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-l

CHAPTER 4 -OPERATING LIMITS

4.12 STORE LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-l

CHAPTER 5 -ARMAMENT LIMITATIONS

PART II - INDOCTRINATION

CHAPTER 6 -TRAINING AND QUALIFICATIONS

6.1 INTRODUCTION.........................................6-1 6.4.3 Tactical Crew Complement . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-l

6.6 QUALIFICATION, CURRENCY, AND REQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS . . . .6-l

PART Ill - NORMAL PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 7 - NORMAL PROCEDURES (GENERAL)

CHAPTER 6 - NORMAL PROCEDURES (FLIGHT STATIONS)

I1 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-1.3

Page NO.

CHAPTER 9 - FUNCTIONAL CHECKFLIGHT PROCEDURES

PART IV - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS

CHAPTER 10 - FLIGHT CHARACTERISTICS

PART V - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 11 -ANNUNCIATOR LIGHTS

CHAPTER 12 - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (GENERAL)

12.8 DITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.9 BAILOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-l

12.10 SMOKE OR ELECTRICAL FUMES OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

CHAPTER 13 -GROUND EMERGENCIES

CHAPTER 14 -TAKEOFF EMERGENCIES

CHAPTER 15 - IN-FLIGHT EMERGENCIES

CHAPTER 16 -APPROACH AND LANDING EMERGENCIES

CHAPTER 17 -EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT

PART VI-ALL-WEATHER OPERATION

CHAPTER 16 -ALL-WEATHER OPERATION

PART VII -COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 19 -COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES

19.1 COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.3 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-l 19.3.1 Voice............................................... 19-1 19.3.2 CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . 19-1

CHAPTER 20 -COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

PART VIII - MISSION SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 21- MISSION SYSTEMS OVERVIEW

CHAPTER 22 - MISSION EQUIPMENT

22.1 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, 4X-22 AND AUXILIARY ICS CONTROL . . . 22-1 22.1.1 Components Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I. : . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1 22.1.2 Master ICS Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

ORIGINAL 12

22.1.3 22.14 22.15 22.16 22.1.7 22.1.8 22.1.9 22.1.10 22.1.11 22.1.12 22.1.13 22.1.14 22.1.15 22.1.16 22.1.17 22.1.18 22.1.19 22.1.20

22.2 22.2.1 22.2.2 22.2.3

22.3 22.3.1 22.3.2 22.3.3 22.3.4 22.35 22.36

22.4 22.4.1 22.4.2 22.4.3 22.4.4 22.4.5 22.46

22.5 22.5.1 22.5.2 22.5.3

22.6 22.6.1 22.6.2 22.6.3

22.7 22.7.1 22.7.2

Microphone Selector Switch .................................. 22-l KS SEL Switch ......................................... 22-1 SPEARER PHONES Switch .................................. 22-l Alternate Switch ......................................... 22-2 Disconnect Switch ....................................... 22-2 Override Switch ......................................... 22-2 Radio Monitor Switches ..................................... 22-2 Crew Control Panel ....................................... 22-2 ICS SEL Switch ......................................... 22-2 Receiver Select Switches .................................... 223 Volume Control ......................................... 22-3 KS IntemoMection Box 22-3 UniversalJackBox . ..::::::::::::::::::. ................................... 22-3 Service Jack Box. ........................................ 22-3 Loud Speakers .......................................... 22-3 ICS Extensions. ......................................... 22-3 Intercommunication Functions ................................. 22-3 COMMAND BELL ....................................... 22-5

AUXILIARY ICS SYSTEM .............................. Auxiliary ICS Control Functional Description ..................... Component Description ................................. Auxiliary ICS Control Operating Procedures ......................

AN/ARC-190(V) HF RADIO SET ........................... ReceiverfDansmitterRT-134l(V)3/ARC-190(V) ................... Control Panel C-10828(V)2/ARC-190 ......................... Antenna ......................................... Antenna Coupler CU-2275(V)UARC-190(V) ................... .. Component Controls and Indicators ... ; ........................ AN/ARC-190(V) Opemting Procedures ........................

CA-33 AN/ARC-l59 UHF ............................... Component Description ................................. RT-115O/ARC-159 Receiver/Transmitter ........................ MT-4658/ARC-159 Mount ............................... Component Controls and Indicators ........................... Power Distribution .................................... Component Description/Switchology ..........................

AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM SYSTEM (WITH SECURE VOICE) ............ Component Description ................................. Controls and Indicators ................................. AN/ARC- 187 SATCOM System Operating Pmcedums ................

ANNSQ-113(V)l RADIO COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM ............. System Description .................................... Component Description .................................. Special Operating Procedures ...............................

LTN-72 INERTIAL NAVIGATION SYSTEM NO. 2 (INS 2) ............. Component Description .................................. Power Requirements ....................................

. 22-5 . 22-5 . 22-5 . 22-5

. 22-8

. 22-9

. 22-9

. 22-9 22-9

‘22-10 22-11

22-l 1 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-13 22-13

22-15 22-16 22-16 22-16

22-20 22-20 22-21 22-22

22-26 22-26 22-28

13 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Page NO.

22.7.3 22.7.4 22.1.5

22.8 22.8.1 22.8.2

22.9 22.9.1 22.9.2

22.10 22.10.1 22.10.2

22.11 22.11.1 22.11.2

22.12 22.12.1 22.12.2 22.12.3

Operation ..................................... Emergency Turn-Off Procedures ........................ Components and Special Operating Procedures ................

WJ-8718 HF SCANNING RECEIVER ..................... System Description ............................... WJ-8718 Operating Procedures .........................

WING STORES CONTROL SYSTEM AND AN/ALQ-170(V) SYSTEM . Component Description ............................. System Operation ................................

VHSVCREQUIPMENT ............................ Component Description ............................. System Operation ................................

MD-1203kJLT AUDIO MODULATOR SYSTEM ............... Component Description .............................. System Operation .................................

UNIVERSAL PYLON WIRING ......................... System Description ................................ Power Distribution ................................. System Operation .................................

. . . 22-44

. . 22-45

. . . 22-45 . . . 22-45

22.13 B2 RADAR SIMULATOR SYSTEM ............................ 22-46 22.13.1 Cgmponent Description .... ... 22.13.2 B Control Functions, Controls, and Indicators ..................................................

22-46 22-46

22.13.3 Power Distribution ....................................... 22-46 22.13.4 System Operation ...................................... 22-46

22.14 22.14.1 22.14.2 22.14.3 22.14.4 22.14.5

IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR STATION. ................. WE8718 HF 3 Scan Receiver Control ..................... AN/ARC-190 HF Radio System ........................ MDD-1203iULT Audio Modulator ....................... VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-l82 ........................ UHF System AN/ARC-159 ...........................

TACIEWO STATION .............................. AN/ARC-l59 UHF 2 Radio System ...................... UHF/UHF System AN/ARC-l82 ........................ ANNSQ-113 ECM 1 AND ECM 2 Countermeasures System .........

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

22-46 22-47 22-48 22-50 22-50 22-50

22.15 22.15.1 22.15.2 22.15.3

22.16 C2WSTATIONSlAND2 ........................... 22.16.1 UHF Controls .................................. 22.16.2 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-l 82 ........................ 22.16.3 AN/ARC-159UHF3throughUHF6RadioSystem .............. 22.16.4 ANiUSQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures System ...............

22.17 RADAR OPERATOR .............................. 22.17.1 8’ Radar Simulator System ........................... 22.17.2 Video Home System ...............................

. . . . . . . . .

. . .

. . .

. . . .

. .

. . .

22-28 22-29 22-29

22-29 22-29 22-30

22-34 22-35 22-39

. . 22-39 . 22-39

22-39

. . 22-42 . . . 22-42 . 22-43

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

. 22-51 . . 22-5 1 . . . 22-52 . . 22-52

. 22-53

. . 22-54

. . . . 22-54 . . 22-55

22-50 22-50 22-51 22-5 1

ORIGINAL 14

22.18 NAV/EWO STATION/STATION 8A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.18.1 AN/l67 SATCOM System (With Secure Voice) . . . . . . . . . 22.18.2 Station 8A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.18.3 Wing Stores Control System and AN/ALQ-170(V) System . . .

CHAPTER 23 - FLIGHT STATION SYSTEMS

............. 22-55

............. 22-55

............. 22-55

............. 22-55

23.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

23.2 AN/ARC-l59 UHF 1 RADIO SYSTEM . . . 23.2.1 Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.2 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures . . . . . . , .

23.3 AN/ALQ-170 POSITION DISPLAY INDICATOR 23.3.1 Component Description . . , , . . , . . . . . . . . 23.3.2 Power Requirements . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . 23.3.3 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PART IX - FLIGHTCREW COORDlNATlON

PART 24 - FLIGHTCREW COORDINATION (GENERAL)

24.1 INTRODUCTION.....................................

24.2 PLANE COMMANDER . ........ 24.2.1 Flight Planning . . . . ........ 24.2.2 Mission Planning . . . . . ........ 24.2.3 Preflight . . . . . . . . . . ........ 24.2.4 Start/Taxi . . . . . . . . ........ 24.2.5 Takeomeparhue . . . . ........ 24.2.6 En Route . . . . . . . . . ........ 24.2.7 h4issions . . . . . . . . . . ........ 24.2.8 Return . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 24.2.9 PostlandinflaxXShutdown ........ 24.2.10 Postflight . . . . . . . . ........ 24.2.11 Debrief . . . . . . . . . ........

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.3 24.3.1 24.3.2 24.3.3 24.3.4 24.3.5 24.3.6 24.3.7 24.3.8 24.3.9 24.3.10 24.3.11 24.3.12

TACTICAL ELECTRONIC Flight Planning . . . . . . . MissionPlanning . . . . . Preflight .......... Taxi ............ Takeomeparhue ..... En Route .......... Missions .......... Retum ........... Descent/Approach. ..... PostlandingffaxiBhutdown Postflight .......... Debrief ...........

WARFARE OFFICER ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ........... ...........

............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............ ............

. . .

. . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

............

............

............

............

............

............

............ ............ ............

. 23-1 23-1

: 23-2 . 23-2 . 23-2

. 23-2

. 23-3

. 23-3

. 23-3

. 24-1

. 24-1

. 24-l

. 24-r . 24-l . 24-2 . 24-2 . 24-2

: ;::: . 24-2 . 24-2 . 24-2

. 24-2

. 24-2

. 24-2

. 24-3

. 24-3

. 24-3

. 2

. 2

. 24-4

. 24-4

. 24-4

IS ORlGlNAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-I.3

24.4 NAVIGATOR ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER .................... 24-4 24.4.1 Flight Planning .......................................... 24-4 24.4.2 Mission Planning. ........................................ 24-5 24.4.3 Preflight ............................................. 24-5 24.4.4 Start/Taxi.............................................24- 5 24.4.5 TakeofUDeparture ........................................ 24-6 24.4.6 En Route ............................................. 24-6 24.4.7 Mission. ............................................. 24-7 24.4.8 Retum .............................................. 24-7 24.4.9 Descent/Approach ......................................... 24-7 24.4.10 Postlanding/Taxi/Shutdown ................................... 24-7

24.5 C2W OFFICERS (C2Wl and C2W2). ............................. 24-7 24.5.1 Mission Planning ........................................ 24-7 24.52 Preflight ............................................. 24-8 24.5.3 Sta~axi.............................................24- 8 24.5.4 Takeoff/Departure ........................................ 24-8 24.5.5 En Route ............................................. 24-8 24.5.6 Mission ............................................. 24-9 24.5.7 Return .............................................. 24-9 24.5.8 Descent/Approach ....................................... 24-10 24.5.9 Postlanding/Taxi/Shutdown .................................. 24-10 24.5.10 Postflight. ........................................... 24-10 24.5.11 Debrief. ............................................ 24-10

24.6 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR ............................... 24-10 24.6.1 Flight Planning ......................................... 24-10 24.6.2 Mission Planning ....................................... 24-10 24.6.3 Preflight ............................................ 24-10 24.6.4 Taxi .............................................. 24-10 24.6.5 TakeofUDeparture ....................................... 24-10 24.6.6 En Route/Mission ....................................... 24-10 24.6.7 Descent/Approach ....................................... 24-11 24.6.8 Postlandinflaxi ........................................ 24-11 24.6.9 Postflight ............................................ 24-l 1 24.6.10 Debrief ............................................. 24-l 1

24.1 RADAR OPERATOR ..................................... 24-l 1 24.7.1 Flight Planning ......................................... 24-l 1 24.1.2 Mission Planning ....................................... 24-11 24.1.3 Preflight ............................................ 24-l 1 24.7.4 Start/Taxi ............................................ 24-11 24.1.5 TakeofUDepartore ....................................... 24-12 24.7.6 En Route ............................................ 24-12 24.7.7 Mission. ............................................ 24-13 24.7.8 Descent/Approach ....................................... 24-13 24.1.9 Postflight. ........................................... 24-13 24.7.10 Debrief. ............................................ 24-13

Page NO.

CHAPTER 25 -AIRCREW RESPONSIBILITIES

ORIGINAL 16

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

pxT PART X - NATOPS EVALUATION

CHAPTER 26 - NATOPS EVALUATION

26.12 FLIGHT STATION CHECKRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.13 TACTICAL COORDINATOR/ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADlNG CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.14 NAVIGATOR/ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADMG CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6

26.15 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . 26-9

26.16 RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . 26-15

26.17 C2W STATION 1 AND 2 OPERATOR EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . . 2623

26.18 IN-FLIGHT TECHNICIANNATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA . . . . . . 26-25

PART XI - PERFORMANCE DATA

CHAPTER 27 - PERFORMANCE DATA INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 26 -ENGINE PERFORMANCE DATA

CHAPTER 29 -TAKEOFF

CHAPTER 30 -APPROACH AND LANDING

CHAPTER 31 -CLIMB AND DESCENT

31.1 CLIMB CONTROL CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 l-l

CHAPTER 32 - FLIGHT PLANNING

CHAPTER 33 - OPERATING TABLES

33.3 USE OF OPERATING TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

I7 (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 9%75PAA-1.3

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Page

No.

CHAPTER 1 -GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Figure l-2. Operator Station Arrangement . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 2 -SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT

Figure 2-46. Electrical Bus Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 247. Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-48. Mission Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-49. 60 Hz Circuit Breaker Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 4 -OPERATING LIMITS

Figure 4-6. External and Internal Stores Carried on P-3A Aircraft .

CHAPTER 12 -EMERGENCY PROCEDURES (GENERAL)

Figure 12-9. Crew Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-10. Priority of Ditching Station Assignments . . . . . . Figure 12-11. Crew Emergency Responsibilities . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 19 -COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES

Figure 19-I. Antenna Locations . . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 22 - MISSION SYSTEMS OVERVIEW

Figure 22-l. Master ICS Control Unit C4162/AlC-22 .................... Figure 22-2. Interconnection Line Grouping ......................... Figure 22-3. AUX ICS System Location ........................... Figure 22-4. AUX ICS System ................................ Figure 22-5. Auxiliary ICS Control Box Controls and Indicators .............. Figure 22-6. C-10828(V)2/ARC-190(V) Control Panel ................... Figure 22-7. C-10828(V)2/ARC-190ControlPanel ControlsandIndicators ........ Figure 22-8. RT-1 lSO/ARC-159 List of Components .................... Figure 22-9. C-9816/ARC-159 ................................ Figure 22-10. C-9816/ARC-159(V) Controls ......................... Figure 22-11. KY-58 Security Unit ............................... Figure 22-12. KY-58 Remote Control Unit. .......................... Figure 22-13. RT-1402A/G ARC-187 SATCOM System Controls and Indicators ...... Figure 22-14. RT-1402A/G ARC-187 Chapter 34 SATCOM System Controls and Indicators Figure 22-15. ANAJSQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures System List of Components .... Figure 22-16. C-12160 Operator Control ............................ Figure 22-17. C-12 160 Operator Control -Controls and Indicators ............. Figure 22-18. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Panel ................... Figure 22-19. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Controls and Indicators ......... Figure 22-20. Operator Control Keypad ............................ Figure 22-2 1. Operator Control Keypad Functions ....................... Figure 22-22. COMM-I Mode Display Functions ....................... Figure 22-23. COMM-2 Mode Display Functions .......................

. . . .

. ...... 2-2 . . ...... 2-3

. . . . ...... 2-5

. . ...... 2-6

. . . . . . . 4-2

. . 12-1 . . . . . . . . 12-2

. . . . . 12-3

. . . . . 19-2

. . . . . . l-2

. 22-2 . . . 22-4 . . . 22-6

22-l . . .22-10 . . 22-l 1

. .22-12 . < 22-14 . . .22-15

. 22-16 . .22-17

. . 22-17

. . . 22-18

. . . 22-19

. . .22-21

. 22-21

. . . 22-22

. . .22-23 . .22-24

. . .22-24 . . .22-25 . 22-27 . . 22-28

19 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Page NO.

Figure 22-24. Figure 22-25. Figure 22-26. Figure 22-27. Figure 22-28. Figure 22-29. Figure 22-30. Figure 22-31. Figure 22-32. Figure 22-33. Figure 22-34. Figure 22-35. Figure 22-36.

INS No. 2 System Components .................... WJ-8718A HF Scanning Receiver. .................. WJ-87 18A/MFP HF Receiver Controls and Indicators ........ C-I 1508/ALQ-170(V) Controller-Indicator. ............. C-11508 Controller-Indicator Controls andIndicators ........ Dual Video Monitors ......................... Video Monitor Controls ........................ AN/ALQ-170(V) System Interconnect Wiring Components ..... MD-l 203AK.T Modulator Front Panel Controls and Indicators ... MD-1203/ULT Modulator Front Panel Controls and Indicators B2 Control Function Select Switches

... .................

Compass System Controllers Functions ................ LTN-72/ASN-124 Interconnections ..................

CHAPTER 26 - NATOPS EVALUATION

Figure 26-I. TACYEWO NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet . . . . . . . . Figure 26-2. MOD In-Flight Communicator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet , . Figure 26-3. MOD Sensor Station Three Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet . Figure 26-4. MOD C3CM Station 1 and 2 Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet Figure 26-5. In-Flight Technician NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet . . . . . . .

CHAPTER 31 -CLIMB AND DESCENT

. . 26-2 26-10

. . . 26-16 . . 26-21

. . . 26-26

Figure 31-12. Four-Engine Climb Control -Normal Rated Power Climb Performance-Configuration E . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2

CHAPTER 33 -OPERATING TABLES

Figure. 33-23. Four-Engine Maximum-Range Operating Table - Configuration E

FOLDOUTS

. . 33-2

Figure FO-1. ASN-124 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-2. Flight Station Circuit Breaker Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure. FO-3. Main Load Center Circuit Breaker Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure FO-4. Electronic Bay Circuit Breaker Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . 22-29 . 22-30

. . . . 22-3 1 . 22-35

. . . 22-36 . . 22-39 . . . 2240

. . 22-4 1 . . . 22-43 . . 2244

. . . 2247 . . . 22-58 . 22-59

FO-1 FO-2 FO-3 FO-4

ORIGINAL 20

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS

A

ADF. Automatic direction finding.

ADRS. Address.

AFC. Automatic frequency control.

AGC. Automatic gain control.

ALL. All stations.

AM. Amplitude modulation.

ASSY. Assembly.

AUX. Auxiliary.

B

BDHI. Bearing distance heading indicator.

BFO. Beat frequency oscillator.

BITE. Built-in test equipment.

BU. Battery unit.

c

C’W. Command and control warfare.

CAC. Compass adapter compensator.

CALIB. Calibration.

ccw. Counterclockwise.

CDU. Control display unit.

CMSS. Countermeasures simulator set.

COMM. Communication.

COMM-1 . Communications mode 1.

COMM-2. Communications mode 2.

CPW. Characters per word.

CW. Continuous wave.

CWF. Continuous wave frequency.

CWV. Continuous wave voice.

D

DF. Direction finding.

E

EA. Electronic Attack. (formerly ECM)

ECCM. Electronic counter-countermeasures.

ECWI. Electronic countermeasures.

EMI. Electromagnetic interference.

EP. Electronic protection. (formerly ECM)

ES. Electronic support.

ESM. Electronic support measures.

EW. Electronic warfare.

EXT. External.

F

FNIB. Forward navigation interconnection box.

FS. Fuselage station.

G

GD. Guard.

GFI. Ground fault interrupt.

H

HERO. Hazardous Electromagnetic Radiation to Ordnance.

HF. High frequency.

HPA. High-powered amplifier.

21 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

I

ICS. Intercommunication system.

IDC. Integrated display computer.

IF. Intermediate frequency.

INS. Internal navigation system.

INT. Internal.

INU. Inertial navigation unit.

ISB. Integrated sideband.

K

kHr. Kilohertz.

KY. crypto.

L

L. Left.

LBA. Limits of basic aircraft.

LCD. Liquid crystal display.

LD. Lower sideband data.

LOS. Line of sight.

LSB. Lower sideband.

LV. Lower sideband voice.

LVL. Level.

M

MEM. Memory.

MFD. Multifunction display.

MFP. Microprocessor front panel.

MGC. Manual gain control.

MHz. Megahertz.

MIC. Microphone.

MLC. Main load center.

MOD. Modulator trigger.

MSU. Mode select unit.

N

NAV. Navigation.

NAV/EWO. Navigation/Electronic Warfare Officer.

NFO. Naval flight officers.

NRL. Naval Research Laboratory.

0

OAT. Outside air temperature.

OFS. Offset.

OSD. On-screen display.

OTR. One-touch record.

P

P. Preset.

PA. Public address.

PDI. Position display indicator.

POSN. Position.

PPI. Plan position indicator.

PPS. Pulses per second.

PRF. Pulse repetition frequency.

PTT. Push-to-talk.

PWR. Power.

R

R. Right.

FUT. Receiver-transmitter.

RC. Resistance-capacitance,

RCU. Remote control unit.

ORIGINAL 22

RDY. Ready.

RF. Radio frequency.

RLY. Relay.

RMS. Radar monitoring system.

RX audio C. Receive audio cipher.

RX audio P. Receive audio plain.

S

SAN. Secure audio switching unit.

SAT. Satellite.

SATCOM. Satellite communications.

SDC. Signal data converter.

SEL. Select.

SEM. Standard electronic module.

SIM. Simultaneous.

SIMOP. Simultaneous operation.

SLP. Super long play.

SP. Standard play.

SQ. Squelch.

SRA. Shop-replaceable assembly.

STAG. Stagger.

SYNC. Synchronization.

T

TACIEWO. Tactical Coordinator/Electronic Warfare Officer.

THRS. Thrashold

TAS. Truaaimpeed.

U

UD. Upper sideband data.

UHF. Ultrahigh frequency.

UPW. Universal pylon tiring.

USB. uppersideband

UV. Upper sideband voice.

V

VAC. Volts alternating cnrmttt.

VCR. Video cassette recorder.

VDC. Volts direct current.

VHF. Very high frequency.

VHS. Video home system.

W

WOD. Word-of-day.

WPM. Words per minute.

WRA. Weapons-replaceable assembly.

WS. Wing station.

X

XMIT. Transmit.

23 (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-I.3

SCOPE

The NATOPS flight manual is issued by the authority of the Chief of Naval Operations and under the Commander, Naval Air Systems Command together with the naval air training and operating procedures standardization (NATOPS) program. This manual contains information on EP-3J mission peculiar aircraft systems and operating procedures required for safe and effective operations. However, it is not a substitute for sound judgement. Compound emergencies, available facilities, or considerations affecting the lives and property ofothers may require modification of the procedures contained herein. Read this manual from cover to cover. It’s your responsibility to have complete knowledge of its contents.

APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

The following publications compliment this manual:

NAVAIROI-75PAC-I.1 (NFO/AIRCREWNATOPS manual)

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-IC (card checklist)

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-l.lC (weapons checklist)

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-IF (functional checkflight checklist)

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 (SUM)

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-12 Series (IFMM)

HOW TO GET COPIES

One-Time Orders

Ifthispublication isneededonaone-timebasis(without future updates), order it from stock by sending an electronic DD 1348 requisition in accordance with NPFC Publication 2002D found on NAVSUP Publica- tion 600 (Naval Logistics Library) CD-ROM disc.

Automatic Distribution (With Updates)

This publication and changes to it are automatically sent to activities that are established on the Automatic

PREFACE

Distribution Requirements List (ADRL) maintained by Naval Air Technical Services Facility (NAVAIRTECHSERVFAC), Philadelphia, PA. If there is a continuing need for this publication, each activity’s Central Technical Publication Librarian must send a revised ADRL report on floppy disk to NAVAIRTECHSERVFAC. Ifan activity does not have a library, then send a letter to the Commanding Offricer. NAVAIRTECHSERVFAC, Attn: Code 25 1, 700 Robbios Avenue, Philadelphia, PA 19111 requesting assignmeot of a distribution account number (if oeces- sary) and automatic mailing of tXure issues of the publications needed.

Note The ADRL floppy disk can be used only to place an activity 00 the mailing list for automatic distribution of future issues of the publications. It cannot be used to make one-time orders ofpublications from current stock. To get publications from stock, see One-Time Orders above.

Once established on automatic distriiution for this or any other NAVAIR technical publication, an activity must submit an ADRL reporton floppydiskatleastooce every 12 months to update or contirm their automatic distribution requirements.

Note Activities not submitting an ADRLreport on floppy disk for more than 12 months may be dropped from distribution of all NAVAIR technical publications.

UPDATING THE MANUAL

To ensure that the manual contains the latest procedures and information, NATOPS review conferences are held in accordance with OPNAVINST 3710.7.

CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS

Recommended changes to this manual or other NA- TOPS publications may be submitted by anyone in accordance with OPNAVINST 3710.7.

25 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

NATOPWACTICAL CHANQE RECOMMENDATION OPNAV 3710/S (490) S/N 0107-LF40%7wo DATE

TO BE FILLED IN BY ORIGINATOR AND FORWARDED TO MODEL MANAGER

FROM (Orlginatw) ( Unit I

TO (Model Manager) Unit

Complete Name of ManWChecklii Revision Date -w- SCtiOn/ChaptW Page ParaSraph

Recommadatlon (be epedflc)

cl CHECK IF CONTlNUED ON SACK

JUStlficati0n

Signature

A&dress of Unii or Command

Rank me

TO BE FILLED IN BY MODEL MANAGER (Return to Or/g/r&or)

FROM DATE

REFERENCE

(a3 Your Changs R-mend&on Dated

0 Your change recommendation dated isacknowledged. Itwfllbeheldforactlonof

the review conference planned for tobeheldat

0 YOUr chacge r-mendatlon Is mc!assl%d URGENT and forwarded for approval to

by my DTG

lw MODEL MANAGER AlRCW

ORIGINAL 26

Routine change recommendations are submitted directly to the model manager on OPNAV Form 3710/6 (4-90) shown herein. The address of the model manager of this aircraft is:

Commanding Officer, VQ-11 Attention: NATOPS Officer NAS Brunswick, ME 04011

Change recommendations of an URGENT nature (safety of flight, etc.) should be submitted directly to the NATOPS advisory group member in the chain of command priority message.

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

The following definitions apply to “WARNINGS,” “CAUTIONS,” and “Notes” found throughout the manual.

An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed or followed.

YOUR RESPONSIBILITY

NATOPS flight manuals are kept current through an active manual change program. Any corrections, addi- tions, or constructive suggestions for improvement of its content should be submitted by routine or urgent change recommendation, as appropriate, at once.

An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc.,which may result in damage to equipment if not carefully observed or

NATOPS FLIGHT MANUAL INTERIM CHANGES followed.

Flight manual interim changes are changes or corrections to the NATOPS flight manuals promulgated by CNO or NAVAIRSYSCOM. Interim changes are issued either as printed pages or as a naval message. The interim change summary page is provided as a record of all interim changes. Upon receipt of a change or revision, the custodian of the manual should check the updated interim change summary to determine that all outstanding interim changes have been either incorporated or canceled; those not incorporated shall be recorded as outstanding in the section provided.

CHANGE SYMBOLS

Revised text is indicated by a black vertical line in either margin of the page, adjacent to affected text, like the one printed next to this paragraph. The change symbol identifies the addition of either new information, a changed procedure, the correction of an error, or a re- phrasing of the previous material. A change symbol in the margin by the chapter number and title indicates a new or completely revised chapter.

Note An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize.

WORDING

The concept of word usage and intended meaning, which has been adhered to in preparing this manual, is as follows:

“Shall” has been used only when application of a procedure is mandatory.

“Should” has been used only when application of a procedure is recommended.

“May” and “need not” have been used only when application of a procedure is optional.

“Will” has been used only to indicate futurity, never to indicate any degree of requirement for application of a procedure.


NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

PART I

Aircraft

Chapter I - Geneml Description

Chapter 2 - System and Equipment

Chapter 3 -Servicing

Chapter 4 -Operating Limits

chaptct 5 -Armament Limitations

29 (Reverse BlanW ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-XPAA-1.3

CHAPTER 1

General Description

1.1 THE AIRCRAFT

The EP-3J model aircraft is a P-3B aircraft modified to include command and control warfare systems. For P-3B specific information (e.g., power plants, dimensions, and general arrangement), see NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 and NAVAIROl-75PAC-1.1.

1.1.1 Mission Equipment Configuration. This information describes changes made to the P-3B aircraft converting it to an EP3J.

Conversion to the EP-3J configuration includes modification of existing operator stations and installation of additional mission-specific equipment. Modi- tied existing operator stations include the flight station, radio operator station, tactical evaluator (TAUEWO) station, sensor station 1 (CZWI), sensor station 2 (C2W2), radar operator, and the navigator (NAVEWO) station. The contiguration required the addition of STA- TION 8A, a mission circuit breaker panel, a 60 Hz converter, and a universal pylon wiring subsystem to support wing store patch panels (refer to Chapter 2).

The AN/AK-22 intercommunications system has been modified to accommodate six UHF radios, one SATCOM radio, two dual audio modulators, two EA/ES radios, two HF radios, and an HF scanner.

To comply with TEMPEST requirements, each radio system associated with the C2W mission avionics suite and the very high frequency/ultrahigh frequency radio system has been fitted with AGC-9 acoustical filters. Four additional AGC-9 KS adapters have also been installed: one at C2W1, one at C2W2, and two at TAUEWO station. When a radio is keyed, the ICS adapters ensure ICS audio routed to that station is dis- connected.

The NAV station has been divided to create an additional position, designated as STATION 8A. Wing store control units are located at STATION 8A and support the universal pylon wiring routed to outboard WS 9, 10, I1,16,17, and 18 via the wing stores patch panel at bay

17. Installed universal pylon wiring harnesses span the aircraft wing interior leading edges and provide power and control signals to various wing station equipment pods.

Equipment bays 15, 17, 18, 19,42,43, and 44 have been modified to receive the new equipment suites and patch panels. Mission equipment power for many of the systems is provided by the mission circuit breaker panel added to the main electrical load center at bay 45 (see Figure 2-l). In some cases, existing power provisions have been modified to support the system upgrade. Modifications to specific stations are explained in the following paragraphs.

1.1.1.1 Flight Station. The flight station has been modified to accommodate an AN/ARC-1590 control unit, patched secure SATCOM, two PDI select panels, two PDIs and the LTN-72 INS.

The AN/ARC-l 59(V) UHF 1 communications system, which replaces the AN/ARC-5IA UHF 1 system, consists of the R/T, control unit, and mount. The UHF 1 control unit is located in the flight station center console. The R/T and mount are located at bay 44. The antenna select control panel in the flight station selects the existing AT-256 upper and lower antennas for use by UHF 1 and UHF 5. The AN/ARC-51A system 5-amp ac circuit breakers are replaced with AN/ARC-l590 IO-amp dc circuit breakers. New circuit breaker identification panels are installed at the forward right-hand electronic rack circuit breaker panel. Additionally, patched secure SATCOM is now available on the pilot secure handset. The handset operates with both UHF 1 and SATCOM. Selection of secure voice operation on UHF 1 and SATCOM for both the pilot and TACCO is performed on the TACCO AUX ICS control.

The PDI and select panel are used to monitor information from the AN/ALQ-170 system pods at WS 12 and 15. The PDI select panel is located at the pilot side console and at the copilot side console. The associated PDI indicators are located on the pilot and copilot glareshields, respectively.

l-l ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

G F E D C B A

D. STATION 8A

E. 1 NAVIEWO STATION

F. TAC/EWO STATION

G. C2W112 STATIONS

Figure l-2. Operator Station Arrangement (Sheet 1 of 8)

ORIGINAL I-2

NAVAIR Ql-XPAA-1.3

__e-----_

/’ /

--.

PILOT PDI , ’ -\ . COPILOT PDI

\

‘\ I I I I

;

i i

FLIGHT STATION CONSOLES


13 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Cdl-75PAA.1.3

IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR STATION CONSOLE


I-4

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3 . . . L . . . .

L

RADAR OPERATOR CONSOLE


1-5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-I .3

................... ........................... ............................ .......................... I I ............................ .......................... :: :: ........................... :

.......................... ....... I I

................... . . e

...................................................... ................

STATION SACONSOLE

Figure 1-2. Operator Station Arrangement (Sheet 5 of 8)

ORIGINAL l-6

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

NAVIEWO STATION CONSOLE


1-7 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

II H

TACIEWO STATION CONSOLE


ORIGINAL l-8

IL 1. . Jl Ll

C2Wi12 STATIONS

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-I.3


1-9

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Master ICS control unit wiring is modified to interface with the AN/AL.Q-170 system. NAV group ICS audio, as selected on pilot and copilot master ICS controls, will connect that position’s MIC line to the voice

annotation recorder contained in the ANIALQ-170 pod.

1.1.1.2 In-Flight Communicator Station. The INFLIGHT COMMUNICATOR console is modified to accommodate a WJ-8718A HF scanning receiver, an MD-1203 dual audio modulator, two AN/ARC-l90 (HF 1 and 2) control units, and an AUX ICS control. The teletypewriter, its associated equipment, and the HF system selector have been removed.

The WJ-8718A HF scanner, designated as HF 3, is a standalone receiver that employs an independent active HF blade antenna. WJ-8718A HF scanner audio is routed to the AN/AIC-22 ICS system as HF 3. The IO- amp dc HF-3 circuit breaker on the forward left electronics rack circuit breaker panel is replaced by a 1 amp 115-Vat circuit breaker at the same location. The HF blade antenna is powered by a 1 amp 28-Vdc circuit breaker.

The MD-1203 dual audio modulator is dedicated to HF 1 and HF 2 operation. Each channel ofthe modulator is routed to an HF transmitter via the AUX ICS control unit. The transmit select switches on the AUX ICS control unit allow the operator to route voice audio and key lines, or MD-1203 audio and key lines to one or bofh transmitters individually. The modulator is powered by a 5-amp 115-Vat 400-Hz circuit breaker on the forward left electronics circuit breaker panel.

HF 1 and HF 2 systems are AN/ARC-l90 radio sets that replace the AN/ARC-94 systems. Each system consists of a receiver/transmitter, control unit, mount, antenna coupler, lightning arrester, dummy load, and a shielded tube to cover the transmission line between the coupler and the lightning arrestor. One system is located at bay 15 and the other at bays 42 and 43. AN/ARC-94 system circuit breakers are replaced by a single IO-amp 3-phase circuit breaker for each AN/ARC-l90 system. Both systems are connected to the existing long wire antennas. An AUX ICS control unit was installed to expand the AN/AIC-22 system, enabling the operator to select voice operation or modulator key operation on selective systems (refer to Chapter 6).

1.1.1.3 Command and Control Warfare Station (C2Wl and C2W2). C2Wl and C2W2 consoles required structmal modifications to accommodate the four UHF control units, two ECM/ESM control processors, an audio modulator, an AUX ICS control, and a VHS VCR. Modification of C2W2 required removal of the

data recorder. Master ICS control units, C-4162/AIC- 22, have replaced the ICS crew control units at C2Wl and C2W2. Both sensor stations share an MD-1203 dual audio modulator for use with the AN/USQ-113 and communication radio systems.

C2Wl console has an ANNSQ-113 ECM 1 control unit, an AUX ICS control unit, and two AN/ARC-l59 control units for UHF 3 and UHF 4. C2W2 console has an ANiUSQ-113 ECM 2 control unit, an AUX ICS control unit, and two AN/ARC-159 control units for UHF 5 and UHF 6 and a VHS VCR with remote control.

UHF 3 through UHF 6 systems are AN/ARC-l59 radio sets. Each system comprises an RT-1150 R/T, a C-9816 control unit, and an MT-4658 mount. UHF 3 through UHF 6 R/Ts and mounts are located at bay 17. AN/ARC-51A system circuit breakers have been removed and replaced with IO-amp dc circuit breakers. All systems are connected to AT-256 antennas.

The AUX ICS control units at C2Wl and C2W2 consoles expand fhe AN/AIC-22 system, enabling each operator to select voice operation for UHF 3 through UHF 6 and both ANAJSQ-113 systems as well as MD- 1203 modulator key operation on UHF 3 and UHF 4 (C2Wl), and UHF 5 and UHF 6 (C2WZ).

The MD-l 203 modulator key is connected directly to ANKJSQ-113 control processors. The ANAJSQ-113 control unit provides modulated audio input to either system. The MD-1203 is powered by a 5-amp 115-Vat 400-Hz circuit breaker on the mission circuit breaker panel.

The VHS VCR is commercial equipment fhat provides training mission case storage for radar images obtained by the radar operator. The VHS recorder itself is located at C2W2 because of fhe lack of available space at the RADAR OPERATOR console. The VCR is operated predominantly in record mode. Control and operation of the VCR unit should be performed with the remote control, also located at the C2W2 console.

1.1.1.4 Tactical Coordinator/Electronic War- fare Officer Station. The TACYEWO console is modified to accommodate the ARC-159 UHF 2 control unit, an AUX ICS control unit, and the LTN-72 MSU and CDU for INS No. 1. Additionally, the ICS jacks have been relocated beneath the TAC/EWO worktable.

The UHF 1 and UHF 2 systems are AN/ARC-l59 radio sets fhat replace the AN/ARC-51 systems. The system consists of an RT- 1150 R/T, a C-98 16 control unit, and an MT-4658 mount. The R/T and mount are located in bay 44. UHF 1 antenna selection is performed

ORIGINAL l-10

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

at the cockpit. The UHF 2 control unit is located at the TACXWO console. UHF 2 connects to a dedicated upper AT-256 antenna located at FS 684. UHF 2 system ac circuit breakers are replaced with lo-amp dc circuit breakers. New circuit breaker identification panels am installed at the forward right electronics circuit breaker pd.

The LTN-72 MSU and CDU for INS No. 1 are located at the TAC/EWO station and interface with the IDC. The LTN-72 No. 2 system is a standalone system. The NAV unit and battery are installed on the floor of bay 44. The MSU, CDU, and IDC are located at the TAC/EWO station. Power is supplied horn two circuit breakers on the forward right electronics circuit breaker panel. The NAV unit is connected to the existing aircratl true airspeed and magnetic compass system.

The AUX ICS control unit at the TAC/BWO console expands the AN/AIC-22 system, enabling the TAC/EWO to select voice operation for all six UHF systems and both ECM systems. Patched secure SAT- COM and UHF 1 are available on the TACXWO’s secure handset. Selection of secure voice operation on SATCOM and UHF 1 for both the TAC/EWO and the pilot is performed on the TAC/EWO AUK ICS control.

1.1.1.5 Radar Operator Station. The RADAR OPERATOR console is modified to accommodate variable PRF equipment. The equipment, as installed in the EPJJ, interfaces with the AN/APS-80 radar system and consists of the B2 control located at the RADAR OP- ERATOR STATION, and the B2 unit located at bay 11. The B* system control box selects either the normal AN/APSdO PRF of 390 to 420 pps or an altered PRF.

This is accomplished by routing the two required outputs horn the SN-234/APS-80 synchronizer through

a relay in the B* unit. Therefore, no cable recontigura- tion is required during flight. Cable provisions for the B* control are located at the RADAR OPERATOR console and for the B* unit in bay 11. Twenty-eight Vdc is supplied to the B2 system from the main load center, dc limiter bus.

1.1.1.6 Station EA. The STA 8A console has been

two ALQ-170 control units, two v&o monitors, ARC: 1, 87 SATCOM R/T, power supply, KY-58 remote control, and an AUK ICS control unit.

The wing-store control units support the universal pylon wiriig routed to wing stations 9, 10, 11, 16, 17, and 18 via the wing stores patch panel in bay 17.

Bach ALQ-170 system consists of an ALQ-170 (V) control indicator, a 9-inch video monitor, a PDI select panel, and a PDI indicator. Both pilot and copilot have a PDI select panel and indicator at their stations. The ALQ-170 system is supported by the universal pylon wiring that is routed directly to inboard stations 12 and 15.

The following navigation instruments are also located at theNAV/EWO console: BDHI, TAS, altimeter, airspeed indicator, and OAT indicator.

1.1.1.7 Navigator/Electron(c Warfare Officer Station. TheNAV/EWO console has been modified to accommodate the ARC-l 87 SATCOM Wr, power sup ply and associated KY-58 remote control, and an AUK ICS control unit. The following navigator’s instruments have been relocated between FS 533 and FS 560: BDHI, TAS, altimeter, airspeed indicator, and OAT indicator. An AUX ICS control unit has been installed at theNAV console to expand the AN/AIC-22 system.

l-11 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Of-75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 2

Systems and Equipment

2.14 MISSION SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS

The original P-3B powerdistribution system has been modified to accommodate EP31 mission-peculiar systems. P-3B HF and UHF communication systems have been removed and replaced with new equipment. Ad- ditional circuit breaker panels have been installed at the MLC and bay 17. Primary aircraft buses are identified in Figure 246 with the associated bus code.

Figure 2-47 provides a list of circuit breakers and associated circuit breaker panels. Each table provides information for each circuit breaker panel and is struc- tured as follows:

1. Column 1 is titled “Circuit Breaker” and lists circuit breaker names as they appear on the circuit breaker panel.

2. Column 2 is titled “Circuit Breaker Panel” and identities the circuit breaker panel that accommo- dates the associated circuit breaker.

3. Column 3 is titled “Bus Code” and shows the bus code for each circuit breaker. Each bus code is defined in Figure 2-47. The bus defined is the source of power for the associated circuit breaker.

4. Column 4 is titled “SystemiWRA” and identifies the system or WRA powered by each circuit breaker. EP-3J mission-peculiar WRAs are identified by nomenclature where possible.

2.15 PRIMARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

The majority ofmission-peculiar systems will be supplied 115 Vat, 400 Hz and 28 Vdc from the mission power circuit breaker panel. In some cases, the original system circuit breakers have been modified slightly to accommodatemission-peculiarequipment. The mission power circuit breaker panel is supplied power from the following buses:

1. MAIN LOAD CENTER, MAJN DC BUS, DC LIMITER BUS, LIMITER NO. 1

2. MAIN LOAD CENTER, MAIN DC BUS, DC LIMITER BUS, LIMlTER NO. 2

3. MAlN LOAD CENTER, MAIN AC BUS A.

The modified power distribution system will support the following systems:

1. AN/AK-22 intercommunication system

2. HF 1 and 2, AN/ARC-l90 communication systems

3. HF 3, WJ-87 18 scanning receiver

4. UHF 1 and UHF 2, AN/ARC-l59 radio sets

5. UHF 3, 4, 5, and 6, AN/ARC-l59 mission radio. sets

6. ANNSQ-113 systems

7. SATCOM, ARC-187 system

8. Wing stores, AN/ALQ-170 system

9. MD-1203 modulator No. 1 and No. 2

10. Wing-storepylons, WS9, 10, 11, 12, 15,16, 17,18

11. B* PRF equipment

12. LTN-72 No. 2 inertial navigation system.

Power generation has not changed. Refer to NAVAIR 01-75PAA-2-29 for description, theory of op eration, and troubleshooting procedures.

2.46 MISSION CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL

The mission circuit breaker panel (Figure 2-48) that provides power to the added mission systems is located

2-l ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

BUS CODE BUS NAME

BUS A 1 MAIN AC BUS A

BUS B 1 MAIN AC BUS B

r MEAC

I

MONITORABLE ESSENTIAL AC BUS

FFAC ~~&IGHT ESSENTIAL-

MDC 1 MAIN DC BUS

MEDC 1 MONITORABLE ESSENTIAL DC I

EXT MDC EXTENSION MAIN DC BUS

FEDC FLIGHT ESSENTIAL DC BUS

r.nR GROUND OPERATION DC BUS

APU ESS ( APU ESSENTIAL DC BUS I

SEDC (START ESSENTIAL DC BUS

60HZ I115 VAC 60HZ BUS I

Figure 2-46. Electrical Bus Codes

on the bay 45 door. Power distribution from the panel supports all the wing station pylons; UHF 3,4,5, and 6; USQ-113 receivers 1 and 2; the 400/60 Hz converter; SATCOM and associated KY-58; MD-1203 modulator No. 2; the B* system, and the PDI select panels for the ALQ-170 system.

Circuit breakers on the mission circuit breaker panel provide ac and dc power to the following EP-3J added systems:

1. UHF3,4,5,and6

2. USQ-113 No. 1 and No. 2

3. ARC-187 SATCOM

4. 400/60 Hz converter

5. PDI select panels

6. MD-1203 modulator No. 2

7. Wing stations 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 16, 17, and 18

8. B2 system.

2.17 400/60 HZ CONVERTER

The 400/60 Hz converter is located at bay 17 and provides 115-Vat, 60 Hz power to four standard wall receptacles in the cabin, allowing the use of60 Hz equipment. Three-phase 115 Vat, 400 Hz from the 400/60 Hz converter 30-amp circuit breaker at the mission power panel is provided to PlOl of the converter. 115 Vat, 60 Hz exits P102 through CB 1, 2, 3, and 4 at the 60 Hz circuit breaker panel located at bay 17 (Figure 2-49), and is applied to receptacles 1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. Receptacle 1 is located at the NAV station to power the ALQ-170 monitors; receptacle 2, also at the NAV station, is used to power test and other associated equip ment (laptop mission computer); receptacle 3 is a GFI type located in the galley for use with test equipment; and receptacle 4 is at C2Wl/C2W2 and is used to power the VHS VCR.

The 400/60 Hz converter provides 1 IS-Vat, 60 Hz power to the following locations, via the 60 Hz circuit breaker panel at bay 17:

1. C2Wl/C2W2 receptacle

2. NAV station ALQ-I70 monitor receptacle

3. NAV station test equipment receptacle

4. Galley test equipment receptacle.

ORIGINAL 2-2

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Panel Bus Code I SystemMlRA

WING STORES MISSION CB PANEL BUS A WING STORES PYLON, STATION 9 POSN 9

WING STORES MISSION CB PANEL BUS A WING STORES PYLON, STATION 10 POSN IO

WING STORES MISSION CB PANEL BUS A WING STORES PYLON, STATION 11 POSN 1,l




IPnsNl7 I WING STORES MISSION CB PANEL BUS A WING STORES PYLON, STATION 17


USQ-113 NO. 1 MISSION CB PANEL BUS A AN/USQ-113 NO. 1 CONTROLLER CONTROL

USQ-113 NO. 1 MISSION CB PANEL BUS A AN/USQ-113 NO. 1 RECEIVER EXCITER RECEIVER EXCTR

r USQ-113 NO. 1 MISSION CB PANEL BUS A HPA

1 USQ-113 NO. 2 1 MISSION CB PANEL 1 BUS A

ANIUSQ-113 NO. 1 HIGH-POWER AMPLIFIER

1 ANIUSQ-I 13 NO. 2 CONTROLLER 1 CONTROL

USQ-113 NO. 2 MISSION CB PANEL BUS A ANlUSQ NO. 2 RECEIVER EXCITER RECEIVER EXCTR

r USQ-113 NO. 2 MISSION CB PANEL BUS A AN/USQ-113 NO. 2 HIGH-POWER HPA AMPLIFIER

MISSION CB PANEL BUS A 1 PP-201 POWER SUPPLY (ARC-167)

MD-1203 NO. 2 MISSION CB PANEL BUS A MD-1203 NO. 2 MODULATOR

60 HZ MISSION CB PANEL BUS A 400/60 HZ STATIC FREQUENCY CONVERTER

WING STORES MISSION CB PANEL MDC POSN 9 DC LIMITER NO. 1





WING STORES PYLON, STATION 9



WING STORES PYLON, STATION 12 C-11508/ALQ-170 NO. 1 CONTROLLER

WING STORES PYLON, STATION 15 C-11508/ALQ-170 NO. 2 CONTROLLER

Figure 2-47. Circuit Breakers (Sheet 1 of 3)

2-3 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

WING STORES PYLON

LIMITER NO. 1

LIMITER NO. 2

TEST EQUIP, NAV 60 HZ CB PANEL 400/60 HZ 115 VAC, 60 HZ RECEPTACLE CONVERTER NAVIEWO

TEST EQUIP, 60 HZ CB PANEL 400/60 HZ 115 VAC, 60 HZ RECEPTACLE GALLEY CONVERTER GALLEY

TEST EQUIP, VCR 60 HZ CB PANEL 400/60 HZ 115 VAC, 60 HZ RECEPTACLE SSI, CONVERTER VHS VIDEO CASSETTE

RECORDER

WING STORES PWR FWD LEFT ARMAMENT CB BUS A .MlBSlON CB PANEL, WING RELAY PANEL STORES

ARMAMENT POWER FWD LEFT ARMAMENT CB BUS A WING STORES, PWR REIAY SEARCH STORES PANEL

AIC-22 ICS FWD LEFT ARMAMENT CB MEDC RADOP AUX ICS (TBl9-A6) PANEL NAV AUX ICS (TB32-810)

TAClEWO AUX ICS (TB16A16) SSI AUX ICS (TB431-D23) SS2 AUX ICS (TB431-D23)

COMMUNICATION FWD RIGHT ELECTRONIC MEDC C-98161ARC-159 NO. 1 UHF-l CB PANEL RT-1 lSO/ARC-159

PP-7095/ARC-159

ORIGINAL 2-4


NAVAIR Of-75PM-1.3

I Circuit Breaker

SECURITY UNIT HF

Circuit Breaker Panel Bus Codf

MONITORABLE ESSENTIAL MEDC DC BUS PANEL

FWD LEFT ELECTRONICS BUS A CB PANEL

FWD RIGHT ELECTRONICS BUS A CB PANEL

FWD RIGHT ELECTRONICS BUS A CB PANEL

SystemlWRA I

KY-75 RCU Ill A Z-AKS I

WJ-8718 PREAMP

WJ-8718 HF SCANNING RECEIVER

LTN-72 NO. 2 INU

LTN-72 NO. 2 INU I


Figure 248. Mission Circuit Breaker Panel

2-5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

ORIGINAL

Figure 2-49. 60 Hz Circuit Breaker Panel

2-6

3.4.10 Pod Radiation Areas

The electronic warfare pods carried by the EP3J may radiate harmful radiation to a distance of 60 feet for personnel. The possibility of fuel or ordnance ignition also exists with RF radiation. Fuel trucks, fueling operations, or HERO susceptible ordnance within 200 feet of an operating active emitter pod may constitute a hazard.

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 3

Servicing

Note During ground operation of any pods, ensure the area is clear of all personnel. The anticol- lision lights shall be turned on by pulling the strobe circuit breaker (F5) on extension main dc to allow both the top and bottom lights to operate. The taxi lights shall also be turned on by activating the taxi light switch on the exterior light control panel. Reset the circuit breaker and deactivate the switch after pod checks are complete.

3-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 4

Operating Limitations

4.12 STORE LIMITATIONS

This portion of Chapter 4 is provided to give the EW crewmember a ready reference for the type of stores that may be carried aboard the P-3 aircraft, for loading information, refer to the applicable EP3J loading manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-75). Only the external and internal stores listed in Figure 4-6 may be carried (singly or in combination) to the limits shown.

1 WARNING 1

l Master arm power shall not be activated on the ground with stores loaded on the aircraft.

a Search power shall not be activatedon the ground with stores loaded except for maintenance checks, operational checks, orpreflight checks by qualified operators.

4-1 ORIGINAL

I STORE VARIANT

AN/ALQ-170 ANY

ALQ-167 G/I

ALQ-167 B/C

ALQ-167 D

ALQ-167 E/F

ALQ-167 J

ALE-43 FULL

1. LBA. POD MUST HAVE FAIRINGS INSTALLED OR INDICATED AIRSPEED IS RESTRICTED TO 300 KIAS.

2. ACCELERATION LIMITATIONS: MAX - 3.OG, MIN - OG, FOR ALL PODS.

3. STATIONS 9,10,11.16, 17, AND 16 ARE MISSION STATIONS, STATIONS 12, 13,14. AND 15 ARE FERRY STATIONS ONLY BECAUSE OF PROP ARC INTERFERENCE WITH THE RADIATED SIGNALS.

4. DISPENSING ACCELERATION l.OG MAXIMUM.

1 ANY AST-6

Figure 4-6. External and Internal Stores Carried on P-3A AircraR

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.XPAA-1.3

CHAPTER 5

Armament Limitations

Contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAG1

5-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

PART II

Indoctrination

Contained in PJA/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAL Ol-75PAG1).

Chapter 6 -Training and Qualifications


NAVAIR 61-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 6

Training and Qualifications

6.1 INTRODUCTION

A continuous training progmm will ensure a high degree of readiness for all flight personnel.

6.4.3 Tactical Crew Complement. To effectively carry out an EW training mission, EPJJ tactical crews should be composed ofthe following EW mission qualitied personnel:

1. Pilot

2. Copilot

3. Third pilot

4. TACIEWO

5. NAViEWO

6. Flight engineer, second flight engineer

7. In-flight communicator

8. C2Wl operator, C2W2 operator

9. Radar operator

10. In-flight technician/port aft

11. Starboard at? observer.

6.6 QUALIFICATION, CURRENCY, AND REQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

Mission commander qualification requirements shall be as follows:

1. Completion of ail requirements for EP-3J aircraft commander or TACZWO.

2. Current instrument rating for all naval aviators and instrument qualification for NFOS.

3. Designated in writing by the squadron commanding officer.

6-l (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01 -ISMA-1.3

PART III

Normal Procedures

Contained in P-3A/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1).

Chapter 7 -Normal Procedures (General)

Chapter 8 -Normal Procedures (Flight Stations)

Chapter 9 - Functional Checkflight Procedures


NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 7

Normal Procedures (General)

Contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1

7-I (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol -75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 8

Normal Procedures (Flight Stations)

Contained in NAVAIR Ol -75PAC- 1


NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 9

Functional Checkflight Procedures

Contained in NAVAIR 0 I -75PAC- 1


NAVAIR 0%75PAA4.3

PART IV

Flight Characteristics

Contained in P3AWC NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1).

Chapter 10 -Flight Characteristics


NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 10

Flight Characteristics


IO-I (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

r--~~~~~~---~rr---r.---r.----r.-------l NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

I

\

I

PART V \

Emergency Procedures I

I

Chapter 11 -Annunciator Lights I

Chapter 12 -Emergency Procedures (General)

Chapter 13 -Ground Emergencies

Chapter 14 -Takeoff Emergencies

Chapter 15 -In-flight Emergencies

Chapter 16 -Approach and Landing Emergencies

Chapter 17 -Emergency Equipment

37 (Reverse Blank)

--- ---

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3 NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 11

Annunciator Lights

Chtained in NAVAIR Oi-75PAC-1

--=--=- <

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 12

Emergency Procedures (General)

This chanter addresses ditchine and bailout orocedures as affected bv the addition of Station 8A. For general emer- I

12.8 DITCHING

The original ditching stations for P-3B aircraft have been maintained for the EP-3Jand an additional ditching station (STA 8A) has been established adjacent to the NAV/EWO station. Refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 andNAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1.1 and Figures 12-9 and 12- 10 for ditching station assignments and Figure 12-l 1 for specific duties.

12.9 BAILOUT

Refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 and NAVAIR Ol- 75PAC-1.1 andFigure 12-11.

12.10 SMOKE OR ELECTRICAL FUMES OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN

General procedures found in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 andNAVAIROl-75PAC-1.1. Refer toFigure 12-l 1 for EP3J specific duties.

l Remove personnel overcome by smoke/fumes from scene oftire before ad- ministering oxygen. Keep oxygen bottles away from scene of tire.

l All crewmembers shall wear flight gloves during electrical tire or fuselage fire of unknown origin.

FLIGHT STATION ESCAPE HATCH ;;;T;02;S STARBOARD OVERWING

EMERGENCJ EXIT HATCH I I I

STSD AFT 06s - STA 15

TACIEWO-STA 10 EXIT HATCH

Figure 12-9. Crew Stations

.-- 12-1

---w-----

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

C R E N

0 N

B 0 A R D

21JxJxJxJxIx(xIxJxJ x 1x1 x ) Xl x 1x1 x (xl x 1x1 x

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8A 9 IO 1, 12 13 14 15 16 17 16 19 20

NOTES:

1. ALL PERSONNEL BOARD NO. 2 LIFERAFT WITH SEVEN OR LESS.

2. ALL PERSONNEL ASSIGNED BY PLACARD TO BOARD NO. 3 LIFERAFT WILL BOARD NO. 2 LIFERAFT WITH 10 OR LESS.

3. OFF-DUTY PILOT/FLIGHT ENGINEER SHALL HAVE READILY AVAILABLE DITCHING STATION.

4. IF THE AIRCRAFT IS CONFIGURED WITH TWO 12-MAN LIFERAFTS, PERSONNEL NORMALLY ASSIGNED TO THE NO. 3 LIFERAFT WILL BOARD THE NO. 2 LIFERAFT.

5. WHEN CARRYING 20 OR 21 TOTAL PERSONNEL, PASSENGERS 19 AND 20 SHALL BE DOUBLED UP AT STATIONS 18 AND 8.

8. PASSENGERS 19 AND 20 SHALL BOARD LIFERAFT 3 AND 2 RESPECTIVELY. IN THE EVENT OF A BAILOUT, THEY SHALL UTILIZE PARACHUTES 19 AND 20. IN THE EVENT OF A FIRE OF UNKNOWN ORIGIN, THEY SHALL ASSIST AS DIRECTED.

TAKE WATER BREAKER BY SON0 STORAGE RACK.

SHALL PERFORM RADAR’S DUTIES.

PERFORMS NORMAL RESPONSIBILITIES.

Figure. 12-10. Priority ofDitching Station Assignments

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.:

DITCHING BAILOUT

PILOT-STATION 1

1. Give sianal for bailout . Warn Crew: “Prepare to Ditch,” time to impact; jettison bomb load; turn search power off; adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness.

preparation verbally and by four short rings on the command bell.

2. Receive acknowledgment from assigned jumpmaster.

3. Reduce airspeed if possible.

4. Depressurize aircraft and trim slightly nose down.

5. Head aircraft toward uninhabited area and engage autopilot. If over water, or uninhabited area, establish port turn and engage autopilot.

FIRE BILL

!. Check crew evacuation: exit through overhead hatch or over wing on port side; board No. 1 liferaft.

6. Give signal to bail out verbally and by one long ring on the command bell.

7. Deploy crash recorder/locator prior to leaving flight station.

8. Put on parachute and bail out through main cabin door.

L COPILOT - STATION 2

1. Set IFF to emergency; establish voice communication if possible.

2. Assist pilot as directed.

3. Put on parachute and bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Announce intention to ditch and time to impact over PA system using ICS override.

!. Set IFF to emergency; establish voice communication if possible; secure loose equipment; and adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness.

I. Exit through overhead hatch or over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferafl.

F IGHT ENGINEER-STATION 3

Adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness.

!. Depressurize: Dump compressors, close aux vent and outflow valve.

I. Exit overwing hatch on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft. (Open overhead hatch only if deemed necessary for egress.)

I. Acknowledge bailout preparation signal (verbal or four short rings on command bell).

2. Depressurize: Dump compressors, open outflow valve, close aux vent.

3. Put on parachute and bail out through main cabin door when directed.

Inspect forward electrical load center. Be prepared to pull applicable circuit breakers as required, report progress to pilot.

Figure 12-I 1. Crew Emergency Responsibilities (Sheet 1 of 5)

12-3 ORIGINA

DITCHING BAILOUT FIRE BILL

IN-FLIGHT COMMUtJICATOR - STATION 4

1. Send position reports and distress 1. Upon receipt of prepatory Remain at station; check signals. command (verbal and/or four behind dust cover above radio

2. Adjust seatbelt and shoulder short rings), send position reports operator and forward

harness. and distress signals, armament interconnection box

2. Put on parachute and when via access door; be prepared 3. After impact, assist in passing

gear out hatch; take any prepared to bail out, assemble in to transmit emergency

front of main cabin door. message and aircraft position accessible parachute; exit over when directed by pilot. wing port side; board No.1 liferaft. 3. Sail out through main cabin door

when directed.

STARBOARD FORWARD OBSERVER - STATION 5

1. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt and shoulder harness.

2. After impact, take water breaker from head; exit over wing on starboard side: board No. 2 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), put on parachute.

2. When prepared to bail out, assemble in front of main cabin door.

3. Sail out lhrough main cabin door when directed.

As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

STARBOARD FORWARD OBSERVER DECK STATION - STATIONS 6 and 20

1. Secure loose equipment, take 1. Upon receipt of prepatory As assigned or directed by ditching station and adjust command (verbal and/or four PPClmission commander. seatbelt. short rings), put on parachute.

2. Station 6: Assist in launching No. 2. When prepared to bail out, 2 liferaff; exit over wing on assemble in front of main cabin starboard side; board No. 2 door. liferaft.

3. Station 20: Assist in launching NO. 3 liferaft; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

3. Bail out through main cabin door when directed.

PORT FORWARD OBSERVER DECK STATION -STATION 7

1. Secure loose equipment, take 1. Upon receipt of prepatory As assigned or directed by ditching station and adjust command (verbal and/or four PPClmission commander. seatbelt. short rings), put on parachute.

2. Assist as required; exit over wing 2. When prepared to bail out, on port side; board No. 1 liferaft. assemble in front of main cabin

door.


NAVAIR Ul-73k’AA-1.3

Figure 12-l 1. Crew Emergency Responsibilities (Sheet 2 of 5)

ORIGINAL 12-4

DITCHING BAILOUT I FIRE BILL RADAR OPERATOR - STATION 8

1. Over water, give bearing and distance to nearest ship or closest point of land.

2. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

3. Afler impact, take port water breaker and first-aid kit; exit over wing on port side; board No. 1 liferaft.

1. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

2. Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft.

1. Check position and give to IFC and copilot on paper; take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

2. Assist TAClEWO as required; take maps, reports, GPS receiver and battery; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 2 liferaft.

1. Secure loose equipment; take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

2. Direct evacuation of crew and survival equipment. Take starboard water breaker; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

c2

1. Secure loose equipment.

2. Turn on starboard overwing exit light.

3. Take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

4. After stop, jettison starboard overwing hatch, launch No. 3 liferaft; exit over wing on starboard side; board No. 3 liferaft.

1. Over water, give bearing and distance to nearest ship or closest point of land.



STATION 8A 1. When prepared to bail out,

assemble in front of main cabin door.


NAVlEWO - STATION 9 1. Check position and give to IFC

and copilot on paper. 2. When prepared to bail out,

assemble in front of main cabin door.


TAClEWO - STATION 10 1. Inspect and report crew ready to

bail out. If time permits, ensure liferafts are launched.


‘1 OPERATOR - STATION 11

1. Upon receipt of prepatory command (verbal and/or four short rings), turn on starboard overwing emergency exit light.



I I I !

If possible, give bearing and distance to nearest ship or closest point of land. Inspect all forward left-hand electronic bays, head and forward radar cabinet and be prepared to pull circuit breakers on applicable circuit breaker panels as required. Obtain the forward fire bottle. Report progress to TACIEWO.

As assigned or directed by PPClmission commander.

Remain at station: obtain aircraft position, draft emergency message and pass to IFC and copilot on paper; assist TAClEWO as required.

Direct crew efforts in locating and fighting fire. Direct remaining crew with unassigned duties to assist as required (obtain oxygen bottles, take messages to flight station, etc.). Continuously report progress and results to flight station.

Activate starboard overwing exit light. Inspect all forward right-hand electronic bays, main electrical load center, areas behind pull-away dust covers beneath tactical station and areas behind cover panels located below C2Wl and C2W2. Be prepared to pull circuit breakers on applicable circuit breaker panels as required. Rewrt progress to TACIEWO:

Figure 12-11. Crew Emergency Responsibilities (Sheet 3 of 5)


C2W2 OPERATOR - STATION 12

1. Secure loose equipment. 1. Upon receipt of prepatory Activate port overwing exit light.

2. Turn on port overwing exit light. command (verbal and/or four Obtain fire extinguisher at short rings), turn on starboard sonobuoy stowage rack; inspect

3. Take ditching station and adjust overwing emergency exit light. electronic bays 17, 18 and 19 seatbelt.

2. When prepared to bail out, and the hydraulic service center;

4. After stop, jettison port overwing assemble in front of main cabin Be prepared to to pull circuit

hatch, launch No. 1 liferafl; exit door. breakers on applicable circuit

over wing on port side; board breaker panels as required.

No. 1 liferafl. 3. Bail out through main cabin Report progress to TACIEWO.

door when directed.

STATIONS 13,18, AND 19

1. Secure loose equipment. Take 1. Upon receipt of prepatory As assigned or directed by ditching station and adjust command (verbal and/or four PPClmission commander. seatbelt. short rings), put on parachute.

2. Stations 13 and 18: Assist as 2. When prepared to bail out, required; exit over wing on port assemble in front of main cabin side; board No. 1 liferafl. door.

3. Station 19: Assist as required; 3. Bail out through main cabin exit over wing on starboard door when directed. side; board No. 3 liferaft.

IN-FLIGHT TECHNICIAN/PORT AFT OBSERVER - STATION 14

1. Secure loose equipment. Take 1. Upon receipt of prepatory Assist TAClEWO as required. ditching station and adjust command (verbal and/or four seatbelt. short rings), put on parachute.

2. Take galley liquid container and 2. When prepared to bail out, aft first-aid kit; exit over wing on assemble in front of main cabin the starboard side; board No. 3 door. liferaft.


STARBOARD AFT OBSERVER - STATION 15

1. Secure loose equipment, turn 1. Upon receipt of prepatory Activate main cabin door on main cabin door emergency command (verbal and/or four emergency exit light. Inspect aft exit light, take ditching station short rings), put on parachute. lefl electronic bays, emp deice and adjust seatbelt.

2. When prepared to bail out, timer motor and relays, ASH-20

2. Launch No. 2 liferaft; exit over assemble in front of main cabin (if installed), top strobe power

wing on starboard side; board door. supply, and Doppler well. Be

No. 2 liferaft. prepared to pull circuit breakers 3. Bail out through main cabin on applicable circuit breaker

door when directed. panels. Obtain aft fire bottle. Report progress to TACIEWO.

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Figure 12-11. Crew Emergency Responsibilities (Sheet 4 of 5)

12-6

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3


INBOARD GALLEY SEAT - STATION 16

I. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

!. Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side: board No. 3 liferaft.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory As assigned or directed by command (verbal and/or four PPC/mission commander. short rings), put on parachute.



OUTBOARD GALLEY SEAT - STATION 17

I. Secure loose equipment, take ditching station and adjust seatbelt.

!. Assist as required; exit over wing on starboard side: board No. 3 liferafl.

1. Upon receipt of prepatory As assigned or directed by command (verbal and/or four PPClmission commander. short rings), put on parachute.



Note

In the event the fire bill is activated and the starboard aft observer position is vacant, the IFT will assume the starboard aft observer duties. If the C2Wl positi on is vacant, either the off-duty pilot or radar operator will assume the C2Wl duties. If the C2W2 position is vacant, either the off-duty pilot or IFT will assume the C2W2 duties.

Figure 12-l 1. Crew Emergency Responsibilities (Sheet 5 of 5)

12-7 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL -----~-~---------------~-~~-~~~~---.

.\\\\~\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\ .\\\\~\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3 NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 13

Ground Emergencies

Contained in NAVAIR 0 I-75PAC- 1 andNAVAIR Ol-75PAC 1.1

irn\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\\\\\\~\~\ irn\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\~\\\\\\\~\~\ NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3 NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 14

Takeoff Emergencies


14-1 (Reverse Blank) 14-1 (Reverse Blank)

CHAPTER 15

In-Flight Emergencies

Contained in NAVAIR Ol-‘ISPAC-I

~\\~~\~L\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\m\\\\~

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 16 I

Approach and Landing Emergencies \ I

Contained in NAVAIR OI-7SPAC- I

CHAPTER 17

Emergency Equipment

Contained inNAVAIR Ol-75PAC-I

17-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

PART VI

All-Weather Operation

Contained in P-3AEK NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAG1).

Chapter 18 - All-Weather Operation


NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 18

All-Weather Operation


18-i (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

PART VII

Communication Procedures

Contained in P-3A/EK NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1).

Chapter 19 -Communication Procedures

Chapter 20 -Communication Equipment


NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 19

Communication Procedures

19.1 COMMUNICATIONS

The EP-3J aircrafi has a highly refined communication system that provides for communications in voice and CW. It is mandatory that every crewmember understand the communication system thoroughly to effectively utilize the high degree of flexibility designed into the EP-3J aircraft. To effectively operate the communication system in coordiited operations, the pilots, tactical/electronic warfare officer, and in-flight communicator must be familiar with the current communication plans, op orders, op- tasks, and commanders’ intentions. Specific fleet communication insfrnctions and techniques are contained in wing communication plans.

Note

A detailed description of all EP-3J aircraft radio and navigation electronic equipment is located in this part and Part VIII.

19.2.1.1 Message Releasing Authority. The responsibility for all transmissions rests with the mission commander (or the pilot in command if no mission commander is assigned). The mission commander should inform the IFCO, pilot, and other crewmembers who may be called on to conduct external communications as to what transmissions are permissible without spe-

cific authority. He should normally sight and release messages for transmission. The message releasing authority may be delegated to other officers in the crew and is encouraged when conditions require the full attention of the pilot (if mission commander) to safely fly the aircraft, such as during low-level tactical, night, instrument, or turbulent-weather operations. The mission commander should be aware of all outgoing messages.

19.3 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

19.3.1 Voice. The EP-3J carries six ARC-159 UHF transceivers, one ARC-182 VHF/UHF transceiver, two VOR receivers, two ARC-190 SSB-HF transceivers, one WJ-87 18A scan receiver, one ARC-l 87 SATCOM and two MD-1203AJLT audio modulators. Should all master control boxes become inoperative because of complete failure of the AK-22 intercom, both HFs can be operated by plugging in a microphone and earphones directly.

19.3.2 CW. The two ARC-190 SSB-HF transceivers are available for communications in the CW mode of operation. Monitoring of the CW circuit is the responsibility of the in-flight communicator. Messages transmitted on this system must be released in accordance with paragraph 19.2.1.1.

19-l ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAk1.3

UHF-2 (FS 664)

ECM-1 RCV ANTENNA I AS4242iUSQ113(v) (FS 567.5) ECM-2 RCV ANTENNA

SATCOM (FS 496) I I AS4242/US&113(v) (f% 777.5)

UHF-3 (FS 366).

UHF-115 (FS 299)

UHF-6 (FS 1182)

I I UHF-5/l (FS 1101) ECM-1 LOW BAND XMIT ANTENNA AS-4243/U%-1 13(V) (FS 723, LBL 34) UHF-4 (FS 1010)

ECM-2 HIGH BAND XMIT ANTENNA AS-4244/USQ-113(V) (FS 691.5, LBL 32)

ECM-2 LOW BAND XMIT ANTENNA AS4243/USQ-11301) (FS 691.5, RBL 32)

HF.3 RCV (FS 212) ECM-1 HIGH BAND XMITANTENNA AS-4244/USQ-113(V) (FS 723, RBL 34)

Figure 19-1. Antenna Locations

ORIGINAL 19-2

NAVAIR 0%‘ISPAA-1.3

CHAPTER 20

Communication Equipment



NAVAIR 01.?JPAA-1.3

PART VIII

Mission Systems

Chapter 21 -Mission Systems Overview

Chapter 22 -Mission Equipment

Chapter 23 -Flight Station Systems

43 (Rewse Blanhj ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 21

Mission Systems Overview



NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 22

Mission Equipment

22.1 INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AK-22 AND AUXILIARY ICS CONTROL

The AIC-22 intercommunication (intercom) system in the EP-3J aircraft is essentially the same as that in the P-3B. The AIC-22 in the EPJJ has been augmented with an AUK ICS control unit expanding the operators’ communication capabilities beyond what is available on the AN/AIC-22 system. Each expanded position has an AIC-22 master control box and an AUK ICS box. Each AUX ICS control unit is identical and interchangeable. The AK!-22 ICS enables crewmembers to communicate with each other and to select the various transmitters and receivers. In addition, the AUK ICS control unit interfaces the C?CM mission peculiar equipment and operator stations to the AIC-22 ICS system. The AUK ICS control unit expands the AIC-22 system to accommodate audio and transmit control access to C2W systems. The interphone system, through several levels of control, provides flexible, convenient intercommunications, radio monitoring, and where applicable, transmitter control to 14 flightcrew stations (15 with AFC 373 incorporated) and 2 groundcrew stations. DC electrical power for the ICS is supplied from the monitorable essential dc bus through the AN/AIC-22 circuit breaker on the forward let? electronic circuit breaker panel. The various interphone components and functions are described in the following paragraphs.

22.1.1 Components Description

22.1.1.1 Mike Smoke Mask-Normal Switch Panels. Three ICS MIKE SMOKE MASK-NORMAL switches are provided in the flight station. One each is located on the pilot and copilot side consoles, and a third below the flight engineer ICS control box. These switches control the microphone installed in the smoke masks. With the ICS MIKE SMOKE MASK position, the smoke mask microphone is connected to the associated jack box; in the case of the pilot and copilot positions, it is connected to the ICS master control panel and the selected interphone or radio transceiver circuit.

22.1.2 Master ICS Control Panel. Mastercontrol panels (Figure 22-l) are located at the pilot, copilot, radio operator, navigator, and tactical coordinator stations. Each of these boxes provides a multiplicity of control functions.

22.1.3 Microphone Selector Switch. The MIC SEL switch connects the station microphone, keying device, and headset to the selected interphone or radio transmitter-receiver circuit.

Note When the MIC SEL switch is placed in either HF position on any master ICS control, keying the microphone will not key the transmitter unless VO is selected for that transmitter on the Cl 176/AGC-9 HF switch selector panel. The radio operator, who has primary control, should be con- sulted before using HF-1 or HF-2.

The pilot and copilot have direct control over frequency selection and operation of VHF and UHF-I transmitters. When using the UHF-2 transmitter, the pilot or copilot should advise the TAUEWO of desired frequency and type of operation.

22.1.4 ICS SEL Switch. The ICS SEL switch connects the station to the desired ICS line. The switching selections available to the various stations are determined by the individual station tactical and operational requirements. Therefore, the master control boxes are interchangeable except for the ICS SEL control knob and panel markings.

22.1.5 SPEAKER PHONES Switch. The SPEAKER PHONES toggle switch in the SPEAKER position par- allels the station loudspeaker with the headset. The exception to this is the NAV/EWO station. Because there is no loudspeaker assigned to the NAV/ EWO, the SPEAKER PHONES switch is inoperative.

22-1 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Figure 22-l. Master ICS Control Unit C416YAlC-22

22.1.6 Alternate Switch. The alternate switch (placarded ACT) is provided to supply a source of audio in the event of a headset amplifier failure. The pilot switch, when placed in the ALT position, connects the pilot headset to the copilot headset amplifier. Similarly, when the copilot switch is placed in the ALT position, it connects his headset to the pilot headset amplifier. All audio selected on the ICS panel of the headset amplifier being utilized is heard in bothheadsets. The TAC/EWO, NAV/ EWO, IFC and STBD FWD OBS are also respective alternate stations.

Note When ALT has been selected on one pilot KS panel, care should be taken to prevent the selection of DISC at the other pilot panel. If this situation exists, no other incoming calls can be heard by either pilot.

22.1.7 Disconnect Switch. The disconnect switch in the DISC position disconnects the station from ICS to allow uninterrupted radio communications. Override operation of sufficient priority by another station will bypass this function.

22.1.8 Override Switch. The ORIDE switch at the pilot or copilot station may be used to contact all stations in the aircrafi except the wheelwells and mad boom. The TAC/EWO override switch may be used to override any disconnects except pilot or copilot. The override function is not operable from any other station.

22.1.9 Radio Monitor Switches. Eleven toggle switches on the master control panels are used to allow monitoring of the various radio and audio circuits in the aircraft. One of the switches is three-positioned, center OUT, to make it possible to monitor a total of 12 circuits with the 11 switches. The AUX position of the three- position switch connects it to the audio circuit selected by the master control AUX RCVR selector at the ICS interconnection box. The 11 remaining receiver or audio circuits are the ADF, VOR-1, tacan BCN (marker beacon), UHF-l, UHF-2, VHFNOR-2, HF-1, I-IF-2, and I-IF-3 (if installed).

22.1.10 Crew Control Panel. Crewcontrolpanels are located at the following stations: flight engineer, stbd fwd obs, RADAR (2 ICS control panels if AFC 373 is incorporated), C2Wl and 2, port and stbd aft obs and galley. Functions of these panels are described in the following paragraphs.

22.1.11 ICS SEL Switch. The ICS SEL switch connects the station to the desired ICS line. The switch selections available to the various stations are determined by the individual station tactical and operational requirements. Therefore, the crew control boxes are interchangeable except for the ICS SEL control knobs and panel markings.

22.1.12 Receiver Select Switches. The RE- CEIVER SEL switches allow crew monitoring of the various receivers in the aircraft. A three-position switch connects the station to either UHF-l or UHF-2. The center switch is connected to the VHF receiver line. The AUX toggle switch connects the station to the radio circuit selected by the crew control switch at the ICS

ORIGINAL 22-2

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

interconnection box. Eight receivers are available through this auxiliary switching method.

22.1.13 Volume Control. Operating the volume control determines the volume of incoming intercom calls and receiver signals. The radio volume is automatically reduced approximately 10 dBs when an indicium call is directed to or from the respective station. The volume level is automatically restored on completion of the intercom call.

22.1.14 ICS lnterconnectlon Box. TheICSinter- connection box, located in the forward left electronic rack, provides interconnection between the radio receiver outputs and the various ICS stations. Two rotary selector switches are provided to allow operational selection of the various receivers for connection to the AUX line for selection with the AUX toggle switches of the ICS stations. The crew control can connect any one of eight different receivers to the AUX line for the crew ICS control stations. Also provided by the ICS interconnection box are screwdriver adjustable audio level potentiometers for controlling the level of receiver audio from each of several audio sources. SPARE positions on the selector switches and SPARE level adjust potentiometers are unused.

22.1.15 Universal Jack Box. Each ICS station is provided with a universal jack box to adapt the ICS system to the use of 99-U headsets and dynamic boom microphones or standard headsets and M-92/U hand- held microphones. An additional universal jack box is provided. It is controlled by the TACIEWO’s master control box and located on the main electrical load center.

22.1.16 Service Jack Box. Service jack boxes are installed at the groundcrew positions, nose wheelwell and tail boom.

22.1.17 Loud Speakers. One speaker is installed at the pilot, copilot and IFC station, two at the TACiEWO station and one in the galley. Each speaker consists of isolation amplifier muting circuitry, an output level control, a PA level control, and the associated speaker. Access to the three adjustments is gained by removing the small cover on the face of the assembly.

Note Three potentiometers are used to control volume level in each loudspeaker. They are adjusted by maintenance personnel and should not be changed by flightcrew except when absolutely necessary. The speaker volume control is used to adjust for normal speaker volume with the SPEAKER

PHONE switch in the SPEAKER position. PA volume is used to adjust normal speaker volume when using the speakers as a public address system. Muted volume is used to adjust for proper attenuation of speaker volume when the microphone is keyed at that station. Adjustments are made for use of a dynamic microphone; use of a carbon microphone will necessitate readjustment.

22.1.18 ICS Extensions. A universal jack box located on the main electrical load center is connected in parallel with the TAC/EWO station and is equipped with a &foot cord and preamplifier. This remote position is controlled by the TACiEWO ICS control panel.

22.1.19 Intercommunication Functions

22.1.19.1 Fixed Group Lines. Seven of the intercommunication groups are interconnected so that all stations in a group will receive calls addressed to that group regardless of the receiving circuits selected at the stations. Individual stations can defeat this feature by selecting the DISC position ofthe ICS disconnect switch on the master ICS control panel. The ICS SEL switch on master ICS control panels is used to select the group desired (Figure 22-2). The groups and stations selected by the ICS SEL switch positions are described in the following paragraphs.

1. PA (all stations except nose wheelwells and tail boom) - The PA line is available to either the pilot or copilot and permits the pilot or copilot to call every speaker and every headset in the aircraft regardless of local station switch selection. He/she, however, cannot call the nose wheelwell or tail boom stations.

2. ALL - The ALL line is available to all ICS stations, including the groundcrew stations. Any call addressed to this line will be received by every station except those using the disconnect function. The pilot or copilot can call every station by selecting ALL and ORIDE simultaneously regardless of any receiving station disconnect switch setting. Groundcrew stations are always on the ALL line.

3. ASW - Radar,NAViEWO,TAC/EWO,C2Wl and 2 and stbd aft observer.

4. FLT CREW - Pilot, copilot, flight engineer.

5. OBSER GROUP - Stbd fwd observer, stbd aft observer, port aft observer, galley.

ORIGINAL

UAVAIR Qi-75PAA-1.3

-

s 3 iz P

-

2

1 5 d -

- I( - -

-

- -

; 3 - _

- _ ( c - _ ( c - _

- _ ( c - -

: - _ n

- _ )I - _

: x : N - _

x - _ : - _ : - _ : - _

- .

- - -

‘:

i -

- 5 - 3 - 3

- -

i { E 8 -

- E - E -

-

-

-

-

-

E -

-

-

-

-

-

1 ii -

- D - D -

- D - -

- D - D - D - D - - - -

4

p ,”

% ZE -

- cxs - cxs - X

- xs - X - X

- X - X -

xs - X - X - X -

xs -

- )

)

1

:

-

-

- 1

)

d” z 3 - - 0 - 0 -

0

NOSE L’VHEELWELL

PILOT -

-

-

-

-

- 0 - 0

- 0

COPILOT

FLIGHT ENGINEER

INFLT COMM

STBD FWD OBS

3 0 - 0 X

RADAR OPERATOR”

3 0

3

3 - 3 - 3 - 3 - -I

0 -

0 - 0 - 0 - 0

NAVIEWO 0 -

-

-

-

-

TAC/EWO -

-

-

-

-

0 -

- X - X - X

STBD AFT OBS

PORT AFT OBS

GALLEY

0

0

TAIL BOOM

Figure 22-2. Interconnection Line Grouping

224

6. NAV - Pilot, Copilot, NAV/EWO, TACI EWO, in-flight communicator.

7. COORD - Pilot, TAC/EWO (this line is available only to the pilot and TAC/EWO).

22.1.19.2 Conference Lines. Two conference lines, CONFERENCE 1 and 2, are available to all flightcrew stations to permit optional grouping of any desired stations.

22.1.20 COMMAND BELL. The command bell provides a means of notifying the aircraft crewmembers to prepare for bailout (four short rings) and to bail out (one long ring). An immediate ditching situation shall be signaled by one long ring only and a PA call.

Power is supplied from the 28-volt flight essential dc bus through the COMMAND BELL circuit breaker located on the forward electrical load center.

Three command bells are located overhead in the forward observer, radar station and galley areas.

22.1.20.1 COMMAND BELL Switch. The COM- MAND BELL switch is located in the center of the exterior lights control panel in the flight station. This is a momentary-type switch that connects power to the three bells when pushed.

22.2 AUXILIARY ICS SYSTEM

22.2.1 Auxiliary ICS Control Functional De- scription. The AUX ICS control units (AUX ICS) are located at NAV/EWO station, TAC/EWO station, C2W1, C2W2 and radio operator station (Figure 22-3). There are C4162/AIC-22 master ICS control units (Figure 22-l) at each expanded position. There are three MX-18280/AGC-9 ICS adapter units at TAC/EWO station, one at C2Wl and one at C2W2, to maintain TEMPEST requirements when the master ICS control unit is selected.

All AUX ICS units are identical and interchangeable. The functions available on the AUX ICS control unit, however, are configured specifically for the intended mission of the equipment at any one position. For an explanation ofthe AUX ICS control unit functions, Fig- ures 22-4 and 22-5. The AUX ICS interfaces with the master ICS control unit’s PTT and MIC audio lines. When the MIC SEL toggle switch on the AUX ICS unit is set to MAIN, PTT and MIC audio lines are routed to the master ICS control unit, allowing selection of radios on the AIC-22 system.

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

When the MIC SEL toggle switch is set to AUX, PTT, and MIC audio lines are routed to the functions available on the AUX ICS control unit. The function select toggle switches on the AUX ICS control unit allow certain C2W systems to use voice operation or MD-1203 dual modulator key operation. At radio operator, NAV and TAC/EWO at all times and at C2Wl and C2W2 in the AUX mode, receive audio from the selected receiver can be routed to left(L) or right(R) audio channel using the L e--, R toggle switches for that receiver. AUX ICS audio is then routed to the AM-3364 jack box. The ability to switch MAIN ICS audio to the L and R audio channels is provided at TACZWO, NAV, and RO stations. The AUX ICS control unit also allows either modulator to be routed to UHF 3 through 6, ECM 1 and 2, or HF 1 and 2 (depending on station) and selects the KY-58 and associated radio for the handset located at TAC/EWO station.

22.2.2 Component Description. Function select switches on the AUX ICS control provide audio and transmit control access to the following EP3J added systems:

1. UHF3,4,5,and6

2. USQ 113 ECM/ESM 1 and 2

3. SATCOM ARC-187 System

4. HF 1 andHF2

5. V/UHF

6. MD- 1203 modulators

7. KY-58 secure communication.

22.2.3 Auxlllary ICS Control Operatlng Procedures

22.2.3.1 ICS. Functions associated with the AIC-22 ICS include the following:

1. MAIN ICS - Selects left (L) or right (R) audio channel for monitoring AIC-22 ICS audio.

2. MIC SEL - Routes microphone and transmit control to either MAIN (master ICS) or AUX (auxiliary control unit).

3. VOL LEFT - Adjusts volume of headset left earphone. Controls audio from master ICS control and other selected audio sources on the AUX ICS control unit.

22-5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%TSPAA-I .3

RI WA WA I

Figure 22-3. AUX ICS System Location

4. VOL RIGHT - Adjusts volume ofheadset right earphone. Controls audio from master ICS control and other selected audio sources on the AUX ICS control unit.

22.2.3.2 UHF. Functions associated with UHF radios include the following:

1. RX LEFT w RIGHT - Six 3-position toggle switches. Center position OFF. Selects left (L) or right (R) audio channel on headset to monitor selected UHF radio (UHF 1 tbrough UHF 6).

2. TX - Four 3-position toggle switches, select transmit source for UHF radio (UHF 3,4,5, and 6). Center position OFF. Up (MIC) routes station microphone audio and transmit control signals to associated UHF radio (UHF 3,4, 5, or 6). Down routes MD-1203 modulator audio and key to associated UHF radio (UHF 3,4,5, or 6).

Note

Selecting MIC does not automatically route receive audio. The appropriate UHF RX switch (3,4,5, or 6) must be selected L or R to complete the two-way path.

22.2.3.3 HF. Functions associated with HF radios include the following:

1. RX LEFT C, RIGHT - Three 3-position toggle switches. Center position OFF. Selects left (L) or right (R ) audio on headset to monitor selected I-IF radio (HF 1,2, or 3).

2. TX - Two 3-position toggle switches select transmit sowe for I-IF radio (HF 1 and 2). Up (MIC) routes station microphone audio and transmit control signals to associated HF radio (I-IF I or 2). Down routes MD-1203 modulator audio and key to associated HF radio (HF 1 or 2).

Note Selecting MIC does not automatically route receive audio. The appropriate HF RX switch (1 or 2) must be selected L or R to complete the two-way path.

22.2.3.4 V/UHF. Functions associated with V/UHF radios include the following:

1. RX L/R - One 3-position toggle switch. Center position is OFF. Selects left Q or right (R) audio channel on headset to monitorV/UHF (ARC-I 82).

2. TX - One 2-position toggle switch. Routes V/UHF microphone and transmit control from source. Down position is OFF. Up (MIC) routes station microphone and tmnsmit contml to V/UHF.

Note Selecting MIC does not automatically mute receive audio. The ViUHF RX switch must be sekcted L or R to complete the two-way path.

22.2.3.5 SATCOM. Functions associated with SAT- COM include the following:

1. RX L/R - One 3-position toggle switch. Center position is OFF. Selects left(L) or right (R) audio channel on headset to monitor SATCOM audio.

2. TX - One 2-position toggle switch that routes SATCOM microphone and transmit control from source. Down position is OFF. Up (MIC) routes station microphone and transmit control to SATCOM.

Note

Selecting MIC does not automatically route receive audio. The SATCOM RX switch must be selected L or R to complete the two- way path.

ORIGINAL 22-6

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

AUXILIARY ICS CONTROL BOX IFC AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure. 22-4. AUX ICS System (Sheet 1 of 3) 30030018

22.2.3.6 ECMIESM. Functions associated with ECM/J?SM include the following:

microphone and transmit control to associated ECM (ECM 1 or ECM 2).

1. RX L/R - Two 3-position toggle switches. Cen- ter position is OFF. Selects left (L) or right (R) audio channel on headset to monitor associated control (ECM l/ESM or ECM 2).

2. ECM 1iESM - One 2-position toggle switch routes ECM I RX or ESM RX to ECM I (USQ- 113) or ESM (not used). Always set to ECM 1.

3. TX - Two 2-position toggle switches. Down position is OFF. Up (MIC) position routes station

Note

Selecting MIC does not automatically route receive audio. The ECM 1 or ECM 2 RX switch(es) must be selected L or R to complete the two-way path.

22.2.3.7 MD-1203 Dual Modulator. Functions associated with the modulator include the following:

1. AUDIO L/R - One 3-position toggle switch. Spring loaded to OFF (center position). Routes

22-7 ORIGINAL

UAVAIR 01.XPAA-1.3

36636616 30030017

TACIEWO AUX ICS FUNCTIONS NAV/EWO AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

Figure 22-4. AUK ICS System (Sheet 2 of 3)

modulator audio to station earphones to check modulator in headset without keying radio.

3. TAC/EWO UHF 1 - One 2-position toggle switch. Up (TACIEWO) routes TAC/EWO’s handset to UHF 1 KY-58.

22.2.3.8 HANDSET. Functions associated with handset include the following: 4. SATCOM - Down (SATCOM) routes

TACIEWO’s handset to SATCOM. 1. PILOT UHF - One t-position toggle switch.

Up (PILOT) routes pilot’s handset to UHF 1 KY-58.

2. SATCOM - Down (SATCOM) routes pilot’s handset to SATCOM.

22.3 AN/ARC-1SOM HF RADIO SET. HF 1 and HF 2 systems are AN/ARC-l 90 radio sets. Each system comprises an RT-1341 Wr, a C-10828 control unit, an MT-6142A mount, a CU-2275 antenna coupler, a 1916-01 lightning arrester, a dummy load, and a shielded tube to cover the transmission line between the coupler and the lightning arrestor. One system is located

ORIGINAL 22-a

@I @

12 3 4 @t 5 6

30030012

C2WI and 2 OPERATORS AUX ICS FUNCTIONS

Figure 22-4. AUX ICS System (Sheet 3 of 3)

at bay 15 and the other at bay 42. Both systems connect to long wire antennas. The AN/ARC-190(V) HF radio set incorporates SIMOP lockout relays and RC time- delay circuits to prevent both transmitters from being keyed at the same time. When HF 1 or HF 2 is keyed, the RC time delay will not permit the radio to transmit for approximately 30 milliseconds. This allows the coax relay of the opposite system time to actuate and connect the coupler to a dummy load. Two MMT33H transformers (Tl for I-IF 1 and T2 for HF 2), provide impedance matching between the 150-ohm audio ports for tbe RT- 1341(V)3/ARC-190(V) RfT and the 600-ohm AIC-22

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

KS system. An F-1629/AGC-9 acoustical filter installed on the MIC audio line of both HF 1 and HF 2 attenuates low-level signals (300 to 3500 Hz). The I-IF 1 and HF 2 radio systems operate identically in plain HF communication mode.

22.3.1 Receiver/Transmitter RT-1341(V)3/ARC- 190(V). The R/T transmits and receives on any one of 280,000 frequencies spaced at lOO-Hz increments. Fre- quencies are derived from a temperature compensated crystal oscillator and digital-frequency synthesizer. The receiver section uses dual conversion with crystal bandpass filters to decrease effects from strong interference signals. Operating modes, frequency, volume, squelch, and preset channel are microprocessor-controlled by inputs from the radio set control. In transmit, the radio set is capable of delivering 400 watts peak-envelope power or 400 watts average power with a continuous duty cycle. Power amplifier circuits are automatically protected from overload, short circuit, and overheat by built-in protection circuits. The receiver and transmitter are both automatically tuned to the same frequency. The receiver is tuned by the fast-lock synthesizer in 10 milliseconds or less. Typically, the transmitter tunes to a manually selected frequency in 1 second and to a preset channel frequency in 35 milliseconds. One conventional tune cycle is required for the system to learn the code for a preset channel frequency.

22.3.2 Control Panel C-10828(V)2/ARC-190. The radio set control has six operating modes: UV, LV, UD, LD, AM, and CW. The 280,000 frequencies and six operating modes are selected by the C- 10828(V)2/ARC-190(V) radio set control. The control also contains a seven-step volume and three-step squelch control and a self-test switch and system fault indicator lights (see Figures 22-6 and 22-7). Tuning and operation information is transmitted to the RfI through serial ASCII control words at RS-422 signal levels and a 9,600 baud rate.

22.3.3 Antenna. Each HF system uses one long- wire antenna. The antennas are attached between the vertical tin and the fuselage. Maintenance on the HF antennas should be performed using instructions contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-2-27.

22.3.4 Antenna Coupler CW2275(V)2/ARC- 190(V). The antenna coupler consists oftwo basic case structures: a sealed control compartment, and a pressurized tuner assembly. The tuner assembly is pressurized at 8 to 9 pounds per square inch using dry nitrogen. This prevents possible arcing at high altitude, provides a cooling medium, and prevents corrosive elements from

22-9 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

SECTION/SWITCH SWITCH FUNCTION/DESCRIPTION

UHF RX LEFT- - RIGHT toggle switches for UHF I through 6 enable operator to switch receive audio from left to rtght audio channels for the radio selected.

HF

V/UHF

SATCOM

ECMIESM

HANDSET

L/R MAIN ICS

TX MICMD-1203 toggle switches for UHF 3 through 6 enable operator to select voice operation or modulator key operation for the radio selected. All witches have a center OFF position.

Rx LEFT- - RIGHT toggle switches for HF 1 through 3 enable operator to witch receive audio from left to rfght audio channels for selected AN/ARC-l90 radio set (HF IRlF 2) or HF scanner (HF 3).

TX MIC/MD-1203 toggle witches for HF 1 and 2 enable operator to select voice operation or modulator key operation for the radio selected. Both switches have a center OFF position.

Rx L- - R toggle switch for V/UHF enables operator to switch receive audio from left to rfght audio channels for the AN/ARC-l82 radii sat.

TX MlClOFF toggle switch for V/UHF radii set enables operator to select voke operation or set TX to OFF.

Rx L- - R toggle switch for SATCOM enables operator to switch receive audio from left to right audio channels for the ARC 187 radio set.

TX MIC/OFF toggle switch for SATCOM radio set enables operator to select voice operation or set TX to OFF.

RXL-- R toggle switches for ECM 1 and 2 enable operator to switch receive audio from lefl to right audio channels for selected ANNSQ-113 radio set.

TX MIC/OFF toggle switches for ECM 1 and 2 enable operator to select voice operation or set TX to OFF.

UHF l/SATCOM toggle switches for pilot and TACiEWO enable operators to select secure communication for either UHF 1 or SATCOM.

Enables operator to switch MAIN ICS audio from let? to right audio channels for the selected radio, on the AIC-22 system.

Enables operator to monitor left and right audio from the MD-1203 modulator.

ESM selection has been provided, but is not connected.

Enables operator to select AIC-22 system or AUX ICS functions.

Controls left audio channel volume.

Controls dght audio channel volume.

Figure 22-5. Auxiliary ICS Control Box Controls and Indicators

L/R MD-1203 AUDIO

ECM I/ESM

MIC SEL MAIN/AUX

VOL LEFT

VOL RIGHT

entering the unit. Microprocessor devices digitally tune the coupler to provide impedance matching between the RR and long-wire antenna that allows maximum power transfer. The coupler uses no mechanical components (motors, variable coils, or capacitors) eliminating the need for periodic maintenance. The digital impedance matching network is made up of fixed coils and capaci-

tars selected by high-voltage vacuum relays. This a)- lows frequencies to be selected at very high speed.

22.3.5 Component Controls and Indicators. Re- fer to Figures 22-6 and 22-7.

ORIGINAL 22.10

Figure 22-6. C-lO828(V)2/ARC-19o(v) Control Panel

22.3.6 AN/ARC-19OM Operating Procedures

22.3.6.1 Discrete Frequency Operation

1. TARE CMIYOFF - Switch to the TARE CMD position. ON indicator will illuminate indicating power has been applied.

2. FREQ - Use the six frequency select thumbwheel switches to select the desired frequency, if necessary.

3. MODE - Position MODE thumbwheel switch up or down to cycle between UV, LV, UD, LD, AM, or CW.

4. SQL - Rotate SQL contml lily counterclockwise.

5. VOL - Adjust VOL control for comfortable listening level.

6. PTT - Initiate antenna coupler tuning by mo- mentarily pressing the microphone push-to-talk button.

7. SQL - Rotate SQL control clockwise until receiver noise just disappears.

22.3.6.2 Preset Operation

1. TAKE CMDlOFF - Switch to the TARE CMD position. ON indicator will illuminate indicating power has been applied.

2. MODE - Position MODE select thumbwheel switch to P (preset).

3. CHAN - Position the two CHAN select thumbwheel switches to the desired preset channel.

4. SQL - RotateSQLcontroliIrllycot&erclcckv&e.

5. VOL - Adjust VOL control for comfortable listening level.

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

6. PTT - Initiate antenna coupler tuning by mo- mentarily pressing the microphone push-to-talk button.

7. SQL - Rotate SQL control clockwise until receiver noise just disappears.

22.3.6.3 ARC-190 Emergency Operation. HF-1 must be maintained (for safety of flight) because ofbus load monitoring/shedding.

22.4 CA-33 AN/ARC-159 UHF

The AN/ARC-159 communication system is a solid-state UHF R/T that provides two-way, amplitude-modulated, doublesidebmd, likanicr mdio communicatiot~ Fach sys- temcomprisesanRT-llSOR/T,aC-9816controlunit,and an MT4658 mount. System components are located at bays 17and44tiththesssociatedcontrolunitslocatcdatSS1,SS2, TACEWO, and the tlight station. Systems are connected to AT-256 antennas.

The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on any of 7,000 frequencies, spaced 25 kHz apart in the 225.000 to 399.975 MHz frequency range. The radio is capable of guard frequency reception and ADF reception. The guard receiver module is a self-contained tix- tuned receiver set to 243.000 MHz and can operate simultaneously with the main receiver. During ADF reception, the radio receives RF signals from the DF antenna and routes the demodulated low frequencies to the DF amplifier. Any one of 20 preset frequencies or any one of the 7,000 frequencies within the range of the radio may be selected.

Six AN/ARC-l59 radio systems are installed in the EP-3J. UHF 1 C-9816/ARC-159 control, located at the flight station, has secure voice capability and the ADF function. UHF 2 control is located at the TAC/EWO station, with the four mission UHF controls at SSl and SS2. The TAC/EWO selects secure voice capability for pilot and TAClEWO secure handset operation on the AUX ICS. The TAC/EWO has transmit and receive capability on all six UHF radios. Pilot, copilot, radio operator, and navigator have transmit and receive capability on UHF 1 and UHF 2. SSl and SS2 have transmit capability on UHF radios 3 through 6 and receive capability on all six UHF radios. UHF 1 and UHF 2 RT-I 150 RiTs are located on shelves 3 and 4 at bay 44, with mission systems UHF 3,4,5, and 6 at bay 17. Refer to Chap- ter 1 for UHF system component location. The mission radios function as communication sets and are capable of being modulated by the .aft MD-1203 modulator.

22-11 ORIGiNAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CONTROL

CHAN

FUNCTION

Two thumbwheel switches that select 30 channels (00 through 29) for preset mode and frequency data.

MODE Thumbwheel switch that selects the following modes:

LV - Lower sideband voice W - Upper sideband voice LD - Lower sideband data UD - Upper sideband data CW r ;~s;tu~~~wave AM - Amplitude modulation

1 - Undefined (CONT FAULT indicator will illuminate when in this mode)

FREQ Six thumbwheel switches that select 290,000 frequency channels spaced at IOO-Hz increments from 2.0000 to 29.9999 MHz. (Selection below 2.0000 MHz will cause a CONT FAULT indication.)

ON Indicator that illuminates when radio set power is turned on.

TAKE Spring-loaded, momentary-action switch that turns radio set on or off. CMDIOFF

TAKE CMD

Indicator that illuminates when the radio set control takes command.

LOAD Momentary-action pushbutton switch that causes mode and frequency data to be stored in the RIT preset channel memory when pressed. Data is stored in the memory location indicated by the preset CHAN switches.

TEST Momentary-action pushbutton switch that initiates self-test cycle. When pressed, all FAULT indicators illuminate and initiates receive self-test cycle. When released, all FAULT indicators are extinguished. If test fails, one FAULT indicator remains illuminated to indicate location of fault. ARer pressing TEST pushbutton, the next time the microphone PTT switch is pressed, a transmit self-test cycle is initiated. If test fails, one FAULT indicator will be illuminated.

SQL A four-position switch that selects squelch threshold level. Disabled when in the fully counterclockwise position.

CPLR FAULT

Indicator that illuminates when a malfunction occurs in antenna coupler.

DSSL

KLT

Alternate-action pushbutton switch that disables squelch threshold when pressed in. In the out position, squelch threshold level is selected by SQL switch.

Indicator that illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the Rff.

VOL

CONT FAULT

An eight-position switch that sets the R/T audio level.

Indicator that illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the control panel, FREQ switches are set below 2.0000 MHz, CHAN switches are set to an unloaded preset channel, the MODE switch is set to P, or the MODE switch is set to A.

Figure 22-7. C-10828(V)2/ARC-190 Control Panel Controls and Indicators

ORIGINAL 22-12

22.4.1 Component Description. Figure 22-8 lists the system components by quantity, nomenclature, part number, and location.

22.4.2 RT-1150/ARC-159 Receiver/Transmitter. The R/T provides transmission and reception of AM signals in tbe frequency range of 225.000 MHz to 399.975 MHz. The m provides normal voice and AM secure voice simplex communications. Additional capabilities include the following:

1. Continuous guard frequency monitoring.

2. Reception of UHF ADF signals on any selected frequency.

3. Transmission of signals 6om a reference signal generator on a preselected frequency.

4. Transmission of an internally generated 1020 Hz tone on any selected frequency.

5. In guard channel precedence and when activated by an external control, the RT-1150 can be turned on and tuned to the guard frequency.

22.4.3 MT-4658/ARC-159 Mount. The MT-4658 mount is a nonconnectorized mount that holds the RT- 1150 R/T, secured by bullets at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All R/T interface is wired directly to the connectors, stowed at the rear of the mount.

22.4.3.1 C-9816/ARC-159 Control. The UHF 1 control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operator to select READ, PRESET, MANUAL, and GUARD frequency operation and selects associated R/Ts for communication or navigation operation. The C-9816/ARC-159 UHF 1 control unit is located in the center pedestal of the cockpit.

22.4.4 Component Controls and Indicators. All controls and indicators are on the C-9816. Refer to Fig- ures 22-9 and 22-10.

22.4.5 Power Distribution

22.4.5.1 UHF 1. The IO-amp COMMUNICATION UHF-l circuit breaker is located on the forward right electronics circuit breaker panel. When the circuit breaker is closed, 28-Vdc power is applied to the UHF 1 radio set control and the PP-7095 power supply. When the UHF ANT RELAY 5-amp circuit breaker is closed, 28Vdc power is applied to RE-219/ARR-40 antenna relay No. 1.

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

22.4.5.2 UHF 2. The IO-amp COMMUNICATION UHF-2 circuit breaker is located on the fotward right electronics circuit breaker panel. When the circuit breaker is closed, 28-Vdc power is applied directly to RT-ll5O/ARC-159No.2andtoC-9816/ARC-l59con- trol No. 2 at the TAC/EWO station.

22.4.5.3 Mission UHF 3,4,5, and 6. Power distribution for each mission UHF radio is identical with the exception of connector designations and terminal numbers. Example provided is UHF 3. When the 7.5- amp MISSION RADIOS UHF NO. 3 circuit breaker located at the mission circuit breaker panel is closed, 28-Vdc power is applied to the C-9816/ARC-159 control and to RT-1150/ARC-159 systems 3, 4, 5, or 6. UHF-3 through UHF-6 operation and control are similar to UHF-l (except for UHF-I secure voice capabilities). Functions and operations are covered in paragraph 22.5.

22.4.6 Component DescriptionlSwitchology

22.4.6.1 AN/ARC-l59 UHF Operation. Operation of UHF 3, UHF 4, UHF 5, and UHF 6 radio sets include preset operation and manual operation. The UHF 2 through 6 radio sets are configured for CLEAR voice transmission only.

22.4.6.2 Preset Operation. Switchology required for preset operation is listed below:

1. VOL - Set to full clockwise. Readjust as required after establishing radio communications.

2. SQ - Set to OFF for maximum reception. Reset to SQ position after establishing radio communications.

3. BRT - Set to full clockwise position.

Read just as required during low-light conditions.

1. MODE - Set to MAIN position.

2. CHANSEL - SetrotarycontroltoPRESETpo- sition. Push and release pushbutton until desired preset channel number is displayed.

22.4.6.3 Manual Operation. Switchology required for manual operation is listed below:

1. VOL - Set to full clockwise. Readjust as required after establishing radio communications.

22-13 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

eceiver/Transmitter RT-1150/ARC-159

MT-4658/ARC-159

AT-256AJARC

Figure 22-8. RT-115O/ARC-159 List of Components

ORIGINAL 2244

Figure 22-9. C-9816/ARC-159

2. SQ - Set to OFF for maximum reception. Re- set to SQ position after establishing radio communications.

3. BRT - Set to full clockwise position. Readjust as required during low-light conditions.

4. MODE - Set to MAIN position.

5. CHAN SEL - Set rotary control to MNL position. Use toggle switches below display to select desired frequency.

22.4.6.4 CLEAR Voice. Press and hold microphone PTT switch while speaking into the headset microphone.

22.4.6.5 Load Preset Frequencies. Load preset frequencies as follows:

1. Set MODE switch to BOTH.

2. Turn BRT control fully clockwise.

3. Set CHAN SEL switch to PRESET. Press CHAN SEL button to select desired preset channel number (1 through 20).

4. Set CHAN SEL switch to MNL. Using toggle switches below display window, select desired frequency 225.000 to 399.975.

5. Press LOAD button.

6. Repeat steps 3,4, and 5 to load all desired preset channels.

22.4.6.6 Squelch. Squelch is enabled when the SQ switch is set to the SQ position. Squelch is disabled when the SQ switch is set to the OFF position.

Note The GUARD position of the mode selector shall not be used, except in emergencies.

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

22.4.6.7 Guard Frequency Operation. The preset knob and manual frequency selectors are ineffective when the mode selector is in the GUARD position.

1. VOL - Readjust as required after establishing radio communications.

2. SQ - Set to OFF for maximum reception. Reset to SQ position after establishing radio communications.

3. BRT - Set to full clockwise position. Readjust as required during low-light conditions.

4. MODE - Set to GD position.

22.4.6.8 Tone. The TONE pushbutton,, when pressed, causes the transmitter to transmit a 1020~Hz tone signal.

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Remove pressure from the TONE pushbutton to end TONE transmission.

22.5 AN/ARC-187 SATCOM SYSTEM @WITH SECURE VOICE)

The AN/ARC- 187 SATCOM system provides plain- voice communications in both SAT and LOS modes of operation. The SATCOM radio is interfaced with a KY- 58 to provide secure voice and data communications in SAT and LOS modes. In plain voice operation, the radio is controlled through the aircraft ICS system by selecting SATCOM MIC and L or R RX on the AUX ICS control. Plain voice SATCOM may be selected by either the TAC/EWO or navigator. During secure voice operations, the ARC-187 receive and transmit audio and PTT are accomplished through one of the two red handsets (located between the TACiEWO and navigator stations or in the cockpit above the pilot station). The handset is selected on the AUX ICS control at the TAC/EWO stations to provide secure SATCOM operation to either the pilot or TAC/EWO. The TAC/EWO controls the SATCOM system in SECURE mode. The components of the AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM system include the following:

1. DM C34-3/B antenna

2. DM H26-90” hybrid coupler

3. TSECKY-58 encryption unit.

22-15 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CONTROL

MODE

CHAN SEL

GD

MNL

PRESET

RD

LOAD

TONE

SQ OFF

TEST

BRT

VOL

Frequency Readout Buttons

FUNCTION

OFF - Controls power to radio. MAIN - UHF communication only. BOTH -UHF communication and guard. ADF - Enables DF mode.

Selects preset channels.

Selects guard frequency.

Enables manual frequency select controls.

Enables preset channel selection.

Displays selected channel frequency.

Loads preset frequencies into memory.

Transmits a 1020 Hz tone.

Enable/disable squelch circuits.

Test frequency indicator shows (888.888).

Controls intensity of frequency readout.

Controls radio receive volume.

Permits control of the underscored digits in the frequency readout.

Figure 22-10. C-9816/ARC-159(V) Controls

22.51 Component Description

22.5.1.1 RT-1402AIG AN/ARC-187. The R/T installed in the EP-3J aircraft is a UHF FM R/T that provides two-way communications over the frequency range of 225.000 MHz to 399.995 MHz. Plain voice communications are provided in both SAT and LOS modes. Transmitter power is adjustable from 1 to 35 watts in SAT mode and 1 to 2 watts in LOS mode. All controls for system operation are located on the front panel. The PP-201 power supply is mounted on the rear of the RT-1402A/G. A separate SATCOM power on-off switch is mounted beside the R/T at theNAV station.

22.5.1.2 DM C34-3/B Antenna and DM H28-1 90” Hybrid Coupler. The DM C34-3/B antenna and DM H26-90° hybrid coupler (with phase-matched RF cables) are located on the overhead at FS 496 and FS 510, respectively. The high-power hybrid coupler provides the antenna with a 90” phase differential to achieve circular polarization.

22.5.1.3 T-SEC/KY-58 Encryption Unit. The TSEC/KY-58 encryption unit is physically mounted on the top shelf of bay 43. The KY-58 Z-AHP RCU is mounted on the console at the NAV station (Figures 22-11 and 22-12).

22.5.2 Controls and Indicators. Refer to Figures 22-13 and 22-14.

22.5.3 AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM System Operat- ing Procedures. SATCOM system operation includes setting frequency presets and offsets, as well as setting the radio for CLEAR voice transmission and SECURE voice transmission. AN/pSC-3 SATCOM system operating modes include:

1. CLEAR voice, SATCOM

2. SECURE voice, SATCOM

3. CLEAR voice, LOS

4. SECURE voice, LOS.

22.5.3.1 Preset Loading

22.5.3.1.1 Initial Control Settings. Set controls as follows:

1. SQUELCH - OFF.

2. VOLUME - OFF.

3. Display - Midrange.

ORIGINAL 22-18

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

Figure 22-11. KY-58 Security Unit

4. SAT OFFSET - Any position.

5. CALL - RCV.

6. FUNCTION - OFF.

7. MODE - Any position.

8. POWER - Any position.

22.5.3.1.2 Uplink Frequency Set (Transmit). Set the uplink frequency for SAT OFFSET A as follows:

1. FUNCTION - SAT.

2. MODE - X2.

3. SATOFFSET - A.

4. CALL - SEND (hold in position).

Note

Frequency display will indicate a frequency between 225.000 MHz and 399.995 MHz (last preset used) or 000.000 (current uplink press frequency is invalid).

5. SetdesireduplinkkquencyusingMHZandKHZ controls while holding CALL control in SEND position.

6. Release CALL control and ensure it returns to the RCV position. (This returns the radio to normal operation.)

Figure. 22-12. KY-58 Remote Control Unit

Note

The uplink frequency has been set, a downlink frequency has not been set, and no offset established.

22.5.3.1.3 Downlink Frequency Set (Receive). SettbedownlinkkquezxyforSATOFFSETAasfol~

1. FUNCTION - SAT.

2. MODE - Xl.

3. SAT OFFSET - A.

4. CALL - SEND (hold in position).

Note

Frequency display will indicate a kquency between 225.000 h4Hz and 399.995 MHz (last preset used) or 000.000 (current uplink preset frequency is invalid).

5. Set desired downlink frequency using h4HZ and KHZ controls while holding CALL control in SEND position.

6. Release CALL control and ensure it returns to the RCV position. (This returns the,radio to normal operation.)

Note

l At this point, both uplink and downlink frequencies have been set and position SAT OFFSET A has been established.

l To preset SAT OFFSET positions B, C, and D, repeat uplink and downlink pmce- dures with SAT OFFSET control in the desired position.

22-17 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%TSPAA-1.3

Figure 22-13. RT-1402A/G ARC-187 SATCOM System Controls and Indicators

22.5.3.1.4 Review Preset Frequencies. Set the controls as follows:

1. MODE - Xl.

2. SATOFFSET - A.

Note The frequency display shows the uplink (transmit) frequency for SAT OFFSET A.

3. CALL - RESET (hold in position).

Note

. Frequency display shows the downlink (receive) frequency for SAT OFFSET A. The downlink frequency is shown as follows:

. DOWNLMK FREQ is equal to the uplink frequency minus SAT OFFSET associated with selected SAT OFFSET position.

l To review SAT OFFSET frequencies B, C, and D, set SAT OFFSET control to desired position and repeat step 3.

22.5.3.1.5 Clearing Preset Frequencies. Set the controls as follows:

1. MODE - X2.

2. SAT OFFSET - A.

3. CALL - RESET (hold in position).

Note Within 2 to 4 seconds the frequency display changes to 000.000, indicating that the

uplink (transmit) preset for SAT OFFSET A has been cleared.

4. Release CALL control and ensure that it returns to RCV position.

5. Verify frequency is clearedby holding CALL control in SEND position and observing 000.000 on frequency display.

Note When CALL control is released, the tiequency display will be blank.

22.5.3.2 Transmit/Receive Mode

22.5.3.2.1 Initial Control Settings. For plain voice transmit and receive operations, set the controls as follows:

1. FUNCTION - SAT OR LOS (for desired operation).

2. MODE - VOICE.

3. SQUELCH - OFF.

4. VOLUME - Adjust as desired.

5. SQUELCH - CW until audio mutes.

6. AUX ICS SATCOM TX - MIC.

7. AUX ICS SATCOM RX - L or R as desired.

Note

SATCOM may be selected at either TAC/ EWO or NAV stations.

8. Frequency MHZ KHZ - To desired frequency.

ORIGINAL 22-18

NAVAIR 0%TSPAA-1.3

CONTROL

MODE Control

SEL CAL Indicator

CALL Control

Frequency Display

SAT OFFSET Control

CON CAL Indicator

DISPLAY Control

VOLUME Control

RXMT Connector

VOICE/DATA Connector

X MODE Connector

SQUELCH Control

MHZiKHZ Controls

FUNCTION Control

SIGNAL Strength Meter

Battery Connector

Battery Connectors

XMT PWR Control

FUNCTION

:: ii - Selects interface with TSECIKY-65. - Selects interface with TSECKY-57/S&

3. RXMT - Retransmit operation. ;

6:

;z[TE - Handset plain voice ~omm++ions, - Call mode that works In conJuncbon vvlth CALL control.

DATA 300 - Selects interface for MIL-STD-1 BBC low-level data equipment (burst or synchronous) at 300 bps.

7. DATA 1200 - Selects interface for MIL-STD-188C lowlevel data equipment (burst or synchronous) at 1200 bps.

8. 2400 - Selects interface for MIL-STD-188C low-level data equipment (burst or synchronous) at 2400 bps.

Black and white ball. Pivots to white when selective call signal is received. In this TM, it will be referred to as the white flag.

Selects any one of four functions and used in conjunction with MODE control:

1. SEND - Spring-loaded, momentary position that initiates the transmission of a l-minute conference call signal.

2. RCV - Provides for reception of a selective/conference call

3. signal. QUIET - Disables audible alarm during reception of a

4. selective/conference call signal. White flags operate normally. RESET - Spring-loaded, momentary position that stops the l- minute call transmission and resets the SEL CAL/CON CAL white flags.

Dis@aystransmNer and receiver frequency in LOS mode and transmitter frequency in SAT mode.

Selects any one of four preset receiver offset frequencies in SAT mode.

Black and white ball. Pivots to white when conference call signal is received. In thii TM, itwill be referred to as the whiie flag.

Adjusts the intensity or extinguishes frequency display.

Adjusts the audio output level of the handset in VOICE mode.

Interface connector for RXMT cable.

Interface connector for handset in VOICE and RXMT modes.

Interface connector for TSECKY-57 in X2 mode.

A$;: receiver gain to mute noise in VOICE, RXMT, Xl and X2

Provides operator selection of operating frequencies.

Powers R/T on and off and selects either SAT or LOS modes of operation.

Indicates relative transmitter power and receive signal strength.

Interface connector for external battery or power supply.

Interface connector for external battery.

Adjusts the transmit power in SAT mode and in LOS mods.

Figure 22-14. RT-1402.WG ARC-187 Chapter 34 SATCOM Syslcm Controls nntl Indkuors

22-19 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

9. MODE - RXMT.

10. XMT PWR - As required.

I I. Signal meter - Observe the following:

a. TRANSMIT - l/4 full scale minimum when transmitting.

b. RECEIVE - 3/4 full scale minimum when receiving a good signal.

KeythepSC-3systemandproceedwith~~~~o~.

22.5.3.3 Secure TransmitiReceive Mode

22.5.3.3.1 Initial Control Settings. For secure voice transmit and receive operations, set the controls as foliows:

1. FUNCTION - SAT OR LOS (for desired operation).

2. MODE - X2.

3. SQUELCH - OFF (ccw).

4. VOLUME - Adjust as desired.

5. SQUELCH - CW until audio mutes.

6. Frequency MHZ KHZ - To desired frequency.

7. XMT PWR - As required.

8. AUX ICS HANDSET - SATCOM (PILOT or TAC/EWO as required).

9. Signal METER - Observe for following:

a.

b.

TRANSMIT - l/4 full scale minimum when transmitting.

RECEIVE - 3/4 full scale minimum when receiving a good signal.

22.5.3.3.2 KY-58 Setup. Perform the following to initialize the PSC-3 dedicated KY-58:

1. FILL (KY-58) - Load CODE (OPERA- TIONAL or TEST as required).

2. Z-AHP POWER - ON

3. PLAIN/CIPHER - CIPHER,

Note Turning the Z-AHP to CIPHER position transfers system control to the RED HAND- SET (TAC/EWO or PILOT) as selected at TAC/EWO AUX ICS control.

22.5.3.3.3 PSC-3/KY-58 System. Key the PSC31 KY-58 system and observe the following:

1. TRANSMIT - i/4 full scale minimum when transmitting.

2. RECEIVE - 3/4 full scale minimum when receiving a good signal.

22.5.3.3.4 Operation (Secure). Key the tmnsmit- ter and wait for the preamble tone to stop, then proceed with communications.

22.8 AN/US@1 13(V)l RADIO COUNTERMEASURES SYSTEM

22.8.1 System Description. The ANRTSQ-113(V) radio countermeasures system provides both fixed- fre- quency and frequency-agile radio communications capability as well as radio frequency band ESM and ECM capability. In the ECM and ESM modes, the system provides communications monitoring capability orjam- ming capability against single-channel fixed-frequency or slow frequency-hopping communications in the HF, VHF, and UHF ranges. When not being used in the ECM/ESM mode, the system may be operated as a standard radio for conventional communications or as an antijam radio for ECCM communications. The two radio communication modes are referred to as COMM-1 and COMM-2, respectively. Two AN/USQ-113 systems are installed on the EP-3J. System No. 1 is controlled and operated from SSl. System No. 2 is controlled and operated from SS2. Additional, system-level, USQ-113 detailed maintenance instructions are contained in NAVAIR 16-3OUSQ113-1.

22.8.1.1 Components. Figure 22-15 provides a iistingofsystemcomponents byquantity,nomenciature, part number, and location. Refer to Chapter 1 for individual system component installations.

22.8.1.2 Power Distribution. Electrical power to both USQ-113 systems is provided by MAIN AC BUS A, distributed through circuit breakers located on the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45. There are three circuit breakers for each svstem located on the mission circuit breaker panel labeled CONTROL, RECEIVER EXCTR, and HPA.

ORIGINAL 22.20

NAVAIR 0%75PAA.1.3

LOCATION

Antenna-Receive AS4242/USQ-11301)

Figure 22-15. ANAJSQ-113(V) Radio Countermeasures System List of Components

L(n, ““>I VW MU, , ““L

Figure 22-16. C-12160 Operator Control

The RECEIVER EXCTR and HPA circuit breakers for each system are 115-Vat, 3-phase contacts. The CONTROL circuit breakers are single-phase contacts, each powered from a different phase of the 1 I5-Vat, 3-phase source MAIN AC BUS A.

The USQ-113 No. 1 operator control is powered by 115 Vat phase A. The USQ-113 No. 2 operator control is powered by 115 Vat phase B. Within each system, 26-Vdc operating power for the USQ- 113 operator con- &01 is produced by the USQ-113 system controller. The 26-vdc power is routed from the system controller connector PI to the operator control connector P2.

22.6.2 Component Description

22.6.2.1 C-12160 Operator Control. The C-12160 operator control provides all operator interface for the

ANKJSQ-113(V)l. Operated-initiated commands are transferred to the system controller and the operator control receives status from the system controller. The status information updates and maintains the display. A printer provides a hard copy of target frequencies when requested by the operator. The operator contml is powered by 400 Hz, 115 Vat, single phase and 26 Vdc. Refer to Figures 22-16 and 22-17 for an explanation of controls and indicators. Electrical power is applied via rear panel connectors Jl , J2, and 13.

22.6.2.2 C-12159 System Controller. The system controller is a microprocessor controlled unit that processes and executes commands from the operator control or data loader and also supplies status information to the display. The system controller does not have any operator controls or indicators. The unit is powered

22-21 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

CONTROL/SWITCH

Display

Keypad

FUNCTION

Cathode ray tube (CRT), &inch display mode.

20-key, lighted keypad. Allows control of the system through keypad entries.

ELAPSED TIME

JAMlMON

LOCAUREMOTE

PWR

BRT

HDST

VOL

FILL

TEST/FEED

DTR

EOP

Records total system has been energized.

Two-position toggle switch which selects jammer or monitor mode of operation when scanning. Also enables transmitter test during system test when in the JAM position.

Two-position toggle switch which selects local or remote operation.

Circuit breaker toggle switch which turns system power on and off.

Control brightness of display screen.

Two headset jacks. Provides input for operator and observer microphone, headphone, and push-to-talk switch.

Two controls to vary the level of headset audio for operator and observer HDST jacks.

Fill jack to provide input for loading target tables and COMM-2 frequency tables from the data loader.

Three-position control which advances printer paper at one line per second when in the FEED position and initiates a printout of all characters when in the TEST position. Center position is off and the switch will spring-return to center.

Light emitting diode that, when loit. indicates the printer is ready.

LED end of paper indicator which indicates that the printer is out of paper or paper is not installed properly.

Figure 22-17. C-12160 Operator Control - Controls and Indicators

by 28 Vdc from receiver/transmitter RT-1647, via front panel connectors J1 through J4.

22.6.2.3 RT-1647 Receiver/Transmitter. The RT-1647 R/T has two frequency bands: 20 MHz to 225 MHz and 400 MHz to 500 MHz. The WT and the external high-power amplifier form the transmitter. The R/T also functions as a scanning RfT and will report detected signals to the operator via the system controller. The RT-1647 does not have any operator controls or indicators. The unit is powered by 115 Vat, 400 Hz, 3-phase, applied via front panel connectors JS and Jl 1, and rear panel connectors J12 and J13.

22.6.2.4 AM-7434 High-Power Amplifier Radio Frequency. The HPA receives the 20- to 500-MHz signal from the R/T and amplifies the signal to 400 watts FM and 100 watts AM. The system controller reduces the power out up to 21 dB in 3-dB steps. The HPA is powered from 115 Vat, 400 Hz, 3-phase power via rear- mountedjacks Jl through J5. Refer to Figures 22-18 and 22-19 for an explanation of the controls and indicators.

22.6.2.5 MX-11376 Data Loader. Hand-held device that provides a means to edit, store, and transfer COMM-2 and ESM/ECM frequency tables to the system controller. Frequency tables and system information can be downloaded from the system controller to the data loader. The data loader has a 2-line, 16character LCD and can be used in place of the operator control.

22.6.2.6 Operator Control Keypad. Figure 22- 20 shows the layout of the operator control keypad. Figure 22-21 gives a mnctional description ofeach key.

22.6.3 Special Operating Procedures

At the operator control unit, set the controls as follows:

a. PWR - OFF.

b. LOCAL/REMOTE - LOCAL.

c. JAM/MON - JAM.

d. TEST/FEED - Center position.

ORIGINAL 22-22

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Figure 22-18. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Panel

e. BRTandVOL - Mid-positions.

22.6.3.1 ANlUSCt-113(V) System Configura- tion. Perform the following steps to properly configure the radio countermeasures system for operational test.

2. Press MODE key, 8 key, and 0 key. The display should provide the following information on the status screen and prompt for the equipment fie- quency range.

1. Set PWR switch to ON and observe that after a short warmup period, one of the ECMiESM displays appear on the display screen.

a. Frequency range - 20.000 - 499.975.

b. Software versions - 40140 (or higher revision).

22-23 ORIGINAL

CONTROUlNDlCATOR FUNCTION

PRIMARY POWER Circuit breaker switch that turns amplifier power on and off and provides overload protection.

REFLECTED/FORWARD Two-position switch that selects forward or reflected power to be measured by RF POWER the POWER MONITOR meter.

POWER MONITOR Indicates level of forward or reflected power when transmitting.

FM LED which, when illuminated, indicates FM operating mode.

Total Hours Indicates total hours unit has energized.

OVERTEMP LED which, when illuminated, indicates overtemperature condition in the HPA.

PRIMARY POWER LED which, when illuminated, indicates that primary power supply is energized.

DC POWER LED which, when illuminated, indicates dc power is applied to the HPA.

AM LED which, when illuminated, indicates AM mode of operation.

Figure 22-19. High-Power RF Amplifier AM-7434 Controls and Indicators

h. KY-58 installed - No.

f--ERTj

Figure 22-20. Operator Control Keypad

c. Remote baud rates - 9600/9600.

d. Dual R/T antennas - Yes.

e. Power reduction - Yes.

f. Power measurement - Yes.

g. loo-watt max power - No.

Note Equipment frequency range for the (V)l system installed on the EPJJ is 3 (20 to 500).

3. After all the options have been set to parameters shown above, the STD key must be pressed to permanently save the system configuration.

4. Press CLR key on keypad.

22.6.3.2 COMM-1 Mode. In the COMM-1 mode, the equipment functions as a normal communications R/T. The COMM-1 mode is selected through use of the C-l key command. When in the COMM-I mode, the bottom two rows of keys on the keypad are redefined to control the R/T. The C-l key command is used to alternate between two COMM-1 menus. The two menus are designated as the primary screen and alternate screen. On the primary screen, the upper left-hand key is W AM/FM; on the alternate screen, the upper left-hand key is COMM-I MODE.

The functions of the keys are shown graphically on the display unit. Refer to Figure 22-22 for the fnnctional descriptions of the redefined keys. To operate the AN/USC&I 13(V)] in COMM-I mode, the operator must refer to the screen for the position of the redefined keys. The function of the keys will be as shown on the screen. To return to the ECM/ESM mode, press EXIT COMM-1 key. The last frequency that was stored will be the frequency stored when exiting COMM-1 mode.

ORIGINAL 22-24

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

KEY FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

White-legend keys

c-1 Communications mode COMM-1

Configures the system to operate in the standard-communications mode.

c-2 Communications mode COMM-2

Configures the system to operate in the antijam-communications mode.

STOP

0 thru 9

Stop scan

Numeric keys

Stops scan mode for changing parameters, functions, and/or target/search table editing. If pressed a second time, scan mode restarts.

Used to enter numbers when entering or changing frequencies, parameters, etc.

RNG

MODE

ST0

LD

CLR

Decimal point

Range

Mode

Store

Load

Clear

Used to enter decimal point when entering frequencies or other parameters that require a decimal point.

Used to enter the lower and upper frequency limits of the ECMIESM search range.

Used to enter parameters and perform functions not directly accessible through the keypad. Each parameter or function is assigned a mode number. Pressing this key displays a mode list summary from which the operator may select the desired mode. Repeatedly pressing this key sequences through all mode lists. Entering the mode number completes the mode selection.

Stores a parameter, frequency, or table in nonvolatile memory.

Used in conjunction with other keys to load variables, to load tables into volatile (current) memory from nonvolatile memory, and to display parameters instead of options.

Aborts the current keypad entry or function and exits the target/search table editor. Pressing the key twice will refresh the ECM/ESM display.

TTBL

CTBL

STBL

TBL#

FMT

TIME

Yellow-legend keys (function keys)

Target table editor Used to load a target table from nonvolatile memory and enter target table editor, reenter target table editor, or store a target table in nonvolatile memory. If the priority mode is selected, then the priority target table is used.

COMM-2 table Used to load a COMM-2 table from nonvolatile memory and enter COMMZ editor table editor, reenter COMM-2 table editor, or store a COMMZ table in

nonvolatile memory.

Limited search Used to load a limited search table from nonvolatile memory and enter search table editor table editor, reenter search table editor, or store a limited search table in

nonvolatile memory.

Table number Used to select either target table 1 or target table 2. Limited search table and priority table selected corresponds to target table selected and are automatically reloaded from nonvolatile memory. The main target tables are not reloaded from nonvolatile memory,

Scanning format Selects scanning format. Repeatedly pressing key sequences through normal, selective priority, and blind scanning formats.

Time-out Used to enter ECM/ESM time-out parameter.

Figure 22-21. Operator Control Keypad Functions (Sheet 1 of 2)

22.25

NAVAIR III-75PAA-1.3

T”,“” I I”..

Jamming modulation

- - - - . . . . . .-.-

Selects type of jamming modulation.

CLK

RCD

Time-of-day clock Sets the time-of-day clock.

Record Initiates the ESM record function. Operator is prompted to enter the minimum and maximum record times.

Green-legend keys (keys active when in editor)

RCL Recall

DEL Delete

Recalls a table editor and steps through the table one frequency at a time.

Deletes frequencies when editing a frequency table or when HOLD scan function is engaged.

Dash Used to specify a range of frequencies when in the editor. Not valid when editing the limited search table or priority target table.

Blue-legend keys

RUN Start scan Starts the search algorithm. If pressed a second time, the search algorithm stops.

HOLD Hold scan Used to hold the scan at an active frequency. The active target can then be monitored or jammed continuously.

FRZ Freeze display Used to freeze the scanning display so that the graphed and listed frequencies can be read and analyzed.

ALT Alternate Used to select or deselect alternate frequency table when in scanning mode. Other&e, used to switch between parameters and options of ECM/ESM display.

White legend on red key

ZERO Zeroize Used to zeroize (erase) target tables and COMM-2 frequency plan from nonvolatile memory. Volatile tables are not affected.

Figure 22-21. Operator Control Keypad Functions (Sheet 2 of 2)

22.6.3.3 COMM-2 Mode. In the COMM-2 mode, 22.7 LTN-72 INERTIAL NAVIGATION the equipment functions as an antijam communications SYSTEM NO. 2 (INS 2) R/T. The COMMZ mode is selected through use of the . . . . C-2 key. When in the COMM-2 mode, the bottom two rows of keys on the keypad are redefined to control the m. The C-2 key command is used to alternate between two COMM-2 menus. The two menus are designated as the primary screen and alternate screen. On the primary screen, the lower left-hand key is ENTER MOD; on the alternate screen, the lower left-hand key is AUDIO TEST. The functions of the keys are shown graphically on the display unit. Refer to Figure 22-23 for the functional descriptions of the redefined keys. To operate the ANiUSQ-113(V)l in COMM-2 mode, the operator must refer to the screen for the position of the redefined keys. The function of the keys will be as shown on the screen.

INS 2 is a self-contamed, all-weather, wonawrae navigation system. The INS is independent of gronnd- based navigation aids. The system supplies continuous accurate position, navigation, and guidance data. INS 2 comprises the INU, BU, CDU, MSU, and a 5-volt lighting panel. The INU and battery are located at bay 44; the CDU, MSU, and lighting panel are located at the TACYEWO console (Figure 22-24). INS 2’s operation is identical to INS 1 ‘s. For additional information on the LTN-72 system, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1, Sec- tion VIII.

22.7.1 Component Description. The MSU and CDU for INS 2 are located at the TAC/EWO station. The TNU and battery are located on the floor of bay 44.

ORIGINAL 22-26

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

FUNCTION DESCRIPTION I RT AM/FM

RCV BW

SQL ON/OFF

PRESET GRD=#O

INCR FREQ

DECR FREQ

CHANGE FREQ

Selects AM or FM of receiver-transmitter.

Selects narrowband, mediumbend, or wideband receive bandwidth.

Turns squelch on or off.

Selects preset frequency channels I through 9. Guard channel frequency is preset 0.

Increases operating frequency in 25kHz increments.

Decreases operating frequency in 2%kHz increments.

Allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to change operating frequency. LD key of keypad enters new frequency without affecting stored frequency. ST0 key stores new frequency.

EXIT C-l Selects ECM/ESM mode of operation.

COMM-1 MODE

START TEST

KY MODE

INCR POWER

DECR POWER

STORE SETUP

EXIT C-l

Primary Screen

Alternate Screen

Selects operating mode: Normal, SATCOM, duplex, orjammer.

Initiates system self-test and-causes results to be displayed on display.

Allows selection of crypt0 mode when system is configured with external crypt0 equipment. When SATCOM mode is selected, key is renamed XMT OFFSET. The XMT OFFSET key, when pressed, allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to change the SATCOM offset frequency.

Increases power in 3dB increments. Power levels in Afvl mode are 0.8, 1.5, 3,6. 12, 25, 50, and 100 watts, Power levels in FM mode are 3,6,12,50,100,200, and 400 watts.

Decreases power in 3dB increments. Power levels in AM mode are 0.8,1 S, 3,6.12, 2550, and 100 watts. Power levels in FM mode are 3.6,12,50,100,200, and 400 watts.

Stores entire COMM-1 setup (does not include preset frequency channels in volatile memory).

Selects ECMlESM mode of operation.

Figure 22-22. COMM-1 Mode Display Functions

The NAV unit connects to the TAS computer and magnetic compass system.

22.7.1.1 LTN-72 INU. The INU determines the geographic position of the aircraft from a gyro-stabilized, four-gimbal, all-attitude platform assembly. The INS is a wandering azimuth system in which the platform assembly is allowed to take an arbitrary angle with respect to true north. The platform assembly consists of four gimbals, two accelerometers, and two gyros. The sensed acceleration signals are sent to the INU digital computer. The digital computer performs necessary computations to develop navigation data and gyro torquing signals. The navigation data is converted in the INS digital sub-

system to analog and binary formats for use by the IDC and CDU.

22.7.1.2 LTN-72 CDU. The CDU is a multifunction display and controller that allows the operator to input waypoint andpresentposition data to the INU. The CDU also provides status annunciators for system ALERT, BATT, and WARN.

22.7.1.3 LTN-72 MSU. The MSU selects the modes ofoperationforINS2andsuppliesoperatingandcontrol voltages to other INS components.

22.7.1.4 LTN-72 Battery Unit. The BU provides a backup soume of dc power. If the INS 400~Hz power is

22.27 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR @I-75PAA-1.3

FUNCTION

COMM-2 FORMAT

ENTER WORD

DESCRIPTION

Primaty Screen

Selects operating format A, 8, C, D, E, or F.

Allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to enter word-of-day. LD key of keypad enters new WOD.

RCV SYNC

INIT SYNC

CHANGE RANGE

EXIT C-2

Places unit into waiting state where it attempts to receive a synchronization signal from another unit. Changes NET SYNC indication from READY to WAITING.

Initiates an emergency start on net synchronization. Makes this unit a net controller. Changes NET SYNC indication from WAITING to READY.

Allows numerical keys of keypad to be used to change frequency range. LD key of keypad enters new frequency range. ST0 key stores new frequency range.

Selects ECM/ESM mode of operation.

Alternate Screen

COMM-2 FORMAT

AUDIO TEST

KY MODE

RELAY MODE

INCR POWER

DECR POWER

STORE SETUP

EXIT C-2

Selects operating format A, B, C, D, E. or F.

Initiates system self-test to allow audio playback test to be performed.

Allows selection of crypt0 mode when system is configured with external crypt0 equipment.

Select relay mode of operation.

Increases power in 366 increments. Power levels in AM mode are 0.6,l S, 3,6,12, 25,50, and 100 watts. Power levels in FM mode are 3.6,12,50,100.200, and 400 watts.

Decreases power in 3dB increments. Power levels in AM mode are 0.8, 1 S, 3.6, 12, 2550, and 100 watts. Power levels in FM mode are 3,6.12,50,100,200, and 400 watts.

Stores entire COMM-2 setup (does not include frequency table).

Selects ECMlESM mode of operation.

Figure 22-23. COMM-2 Mode Display Functions

interrupted, the system automatically switches to the BU for 27.5 Vdc power.

22.7.i.5 +5Volt Lighting Panel. The lighting panel, located at the TAC/EWO’s console, provides +5 Vat power to the MSU and CDU lighting circuits.

22.7.2 Power Requlrements. The LTN-72 system is supplied 11 S-Vat, 400-Hz power from the main ac bus B. The INU also receives 26-Vat, phase B power via the FNIB for synchro excitation. To apply power to INS 2 system, press the following circuit breakers:

1. HEATER POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics circuit breaker panel.

2. SYSTEM POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics circuit breaker panel.

22.7.3 Operation. The lNU power supply converts 115-Vat, phase B, 400-Hz power input to 27.5 Vdc and 28 Vdc. The ac input and a 115-Vat return are routed directly from the SYSTEM POWER (ARlNC561) circuit breaker to INU connector 2JlB. Also, a 115-Vat, phase B and 115-Vat return are routed from the HEATER POWER (ARlNCS61) circuit breaker. The BU receives 27.5 Vdc from the INU. The 28 Vdc is routed to the MSU, the CDU, and to the INU fan power control relay. For control settings, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-I 1.

ORIGINAL 22-28

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

NOMENCLATURE PIN LOCATION

Inertial Navigation Unit 452080-05 Bays 43,44

Control Display Unit 452090-02 Copilot Side Console

Mode Selector Unit 452100-01 Copilot Side Console

Battery Unit 500012-01 Bay 44

Lighting Panel 91050133-029 Copilot Side Console

Figure 22-24. INS No. 2 System Components

22.7.3.1 Magnetic Heading Input. INU 2 uses the magnetic heading output signal provided by INS 1, CAC. This signal is routed out of the CAC to INU 2 via the FNIB.

22.7.3.2 True Airspeed Unit. INU 2 uses the output signals from the TAS computer that is provided to INS 1. These signals go directly from the TAS computer to the TAS indicator, INU 1, and INU 2.

22.7.3.3 Platform Heading Reference. INU 2 uses 26-Vat, phase A reference signal that is provided to INU 1 from the FNIB.

22.7.3.4 CDU Signals. The CDU converts data sent by the INU and displays it as alphanumeric characters. Communication from the INU is accomplished using four 32-bit words, a data valid discrete, and three annunciator discretes. The data valid discrete enables the CDU to display data. The annunciator discretes are controlled by the INU and go directly to the ALERT, BATT, and WARN annunciators. Present position and waypoint data is sent from the CDU to the INU, using one 32-bit word and a data valid discrete. The data sent from the CDU is determined by setting the AUTO/MANiRMT switch and the data keyboard pushbuttons.

22.7.3.5 MSU Signals. TheMSUcontrolspowerto the INS and the mode ofoperation. The INS operational codes are selected by a five-position selector switch on the MSU. Modes of operation are Standby (STBY), ALIGN, Navigation (NAV), and Attitude Reference (ATT REF).

22.7.3.6 Monitor Circuit Signals. Monitor circuits in the INU are controlled by the digital computer and provide flag signals and action/malfimction/status codes to the CDU and MSU.

22.7.3.7 Control/Data Signals. The INU provides No. 1 pitch and roll, platform heading, true heading valid, primary P/R warning, Nos. 2 and 3 pitch and

roll, Nos. 1 and 2 digital warning output, digital warning input, and cross system automatic data input information as data to the CDU. INU 2 also provides ARINC binary (BIN) clock, sync, and data signals to all interfaced navigation equipment for timing and communication.

22.7.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. To remove power in an emergency situation, pull the following circuit breakers:

a. HEATER POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

b. SYSTEM POWER (ARINC561) circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

22.7.5 Components and Special Operating Procedures. SeeNAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 for detailed descriptions and operating procedures.

22.6 WJ-6716 HF SCANNING RECEIVER

22.6.1 System Description. The WJ-8718AMFP HF receiver (Figure 22-25) is capable of receiving and demodulating frequencies between 5 kHz and 29.9999 MHz in seven modes, including AM, FM, USB, LSB, ISB, CWV, and CWF. Five selectable bandwidths may be used with AM, FM, and CW modes. Tuning is accomplished by a tuning wheel, keypad, or any of 99 programmable memory channels. The receiver will AUTO SCAN memory channels from 1 through 86. Channels 87 through 99 are reserved for frequency sector scan data.

The WE871 8A/MFP HF receiver is located at the radio operator’s station. All receiver controlsare located on the face of the panel-mounted unit.

The HF scanner antenna is a dual output, receive only antenna. The antenna is located on the forward-right side

22.29 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75P&b1.3

Figure 22-25. WJ-8718A HF Scanning Receiver

of the aircraft at FS 212. The antenna has a built-m preamplifier.

The system components are listed below.

Unit - Part No. Location

1. HF receiver WJ-87 1 SAIMFP In-flight communica tor station

2. I-IF scanner antema 212

GA000062-001 Forward- right side, station

22.8.2 WJ-8718 Operating Procedures

22.8.2.1 HF 3 Scan Receiver Control. HF 3 comprises a WE87 18A scan receiver and an active blade HF antenna. HF 3 audio is accessible to the operator on the AN/AIC-22 system and the AUK ICS system. The WJ- 871 SA/MFP option allows local digital control ofall HF 3 receiver parameters while providing access to 100 programmable memory channels. Local control of the receiver is accomplished through momentary-contact pushbutton switches arranged in functional blocks on the WJ-8718AiMFP frontpanel(seeFigure22-25). Fig- ure 22-26 lists and defines the functions of the front panel controls and indicators.

22.8.2.2 HF 3 Scan Receiver Operation. Apply power to the WJ-8718A scan receiver and associated antenna by pushing in the DC HF 3 and WJ-8718 PREAMP circuit breaker on the forward left electronics circuit breaker panel.

The general purpose keypad is a 16button switch block located to the left of the tuning wheel. The multiRmction, numerical selectionbuttonslabeledOthmugh9 areutilii to enter RF and BFO t?equencies, signal threshold level, BFO offset, dwell time, and memory address. A special

function key (*) is used to place the receiver in the BITE mode and to clear the numbered memory channels. Also located on the same keypad and on other keypads are terminator function keys that allow the operator to complete a numerical entry by assigning its function. An accepted numerical keypad entry is not acted upon until a termination switch is activated. Terminator switch names and their assigned functions are as follows:

KeJ@ Switch Function

General Key- MHZ pad kHz

RF frequency BFO or RF frequency

MEM ADRS Keypad

RECALL Memory STORE address

Memory address

Scanner Mode Keypad

EXAM DWEEL THRS

Memory address Scan pause, in seconds Signal level threshold

General Key- pad

(‘) Access BITE (used with 17) Receiver BITE test Clears memory channels 1 thru 16 (used with 10)

The CLEAR key will remove an undetermined numerical entry from the receiver’s input circuitty. Once the terminator is entered, the CLEAR switch does noth- ing. The CLEAR switch is also used to release the EXAM mode.

ORIGINAL 22.30

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

CONTROUINDICATOR FUNCTION

AUDIO SIG STR meter Displays signal strength of received audio signal. Screwdriver adjustment (below center of meter) used to calibrate display.

Pushbutton that selects line audio level on AUDIO SIG STR meter.

LINE AUDIO

SIGNAL STR

AM, FM, USB. LSB. ISB, CWV, and CWF

BFO

BFO OFSITHRS LVL display

FREQUENCY/MHZ

POWER PUSH ON/OFF

SCANNER MODE EXAM, HANDOFF, AUTO SCAN, LOCKOUT, THRS, and DWELL

GAIN MODE MGC

SLOW, FAST

RF GAIN

IF BANDWlDTHlkHz .3, 1, 3.2, 6, and 16

FAULT ENTRYIDATAIRCVR

Keypad

Tuning wheel

TUNE FAST, MED, SLOW, LOCK

PHONE LEVEL ISB, NORM

LINE AUDIO LEVEL

LOCAL and REMOTE

MEM ADRS display

RECALL and STORE

Pushbutton that selects signal strength on meter.

Seven pushbuttons that select the detection mode.

Pushbutton that engages beat frequency oscillator function. (Used with CWV pushbutton.)

A 4 character digital display that shows the selected BFO of&et or threshold level.

Seven-character digital display that shows selected frequency.

Pushbutton that energizesldeenergizes receiver.

Sii pushbuttons that select desired operating mode.

Pushbutton that selects manual gain control. (Used with RF GAIN control.) Two pushbuttons that select AGC attack and decay time.

Analog control for manual gain control. (Used with GAIN MODE MGC pushbutton.)

Fiie pushbuttons that select intermediate frequency bandwidth.

Three visual FAULT indicators.

A 16-pushbutton keypad selects RFlBFO frequency, signal level BFO Dwell memory address, and BITE.

Selects desired frequency.

Four pushbuttons that select rate of change for tuning wheel.

Stacked dual analog controls adjust the No. 1 and No. 2 audio levels.

Screwdriver adjustment used to adjust audio level.

Two pushbuttons that select control position for receiver (not used on EP-3J).

Two-character digital display of selected memory address.

Two pushbuttons that access 99 programmable memory channels. (Used with MEM ADRS display and keypad.)

Figure 22-26. WJ-8718AMFP HF Receiver Controls and Indicators

The special iimction switch is identified with an asterisk (*). The * key is used, in this application, to access BITE program mode, receiver BITE tests, and to clear all numbered memory channels. The * key also turns on/off special operating modes, such as handoff, master/slave, and dwell.

The * key provides access to a BITE program that provides a diagnostic test of the front panel switches. Because the execution of the program is software dependent, the program also provides a test of the microprocessor, selected signals, EPROM, and data lines. The program is accessed by pressing the 1,7, and * keys, in

22-31 ORIGINAL

that order. All the LEDs and each segment of the 7-segment display (except the BFO sign) on the front panel will immediately come on.

Pressing I,& and *, in order, will invoke the receiver BITE tests. The receiver BITE tests consist of seven tests that examineRAM, +15 V, -15 V, lstLO,ZndLO, bandwidth selection, and BFO tuning, in the order listed, producing an error level code in the process. The test in progress is displayed by number in the BFO OFS/THRS LVL display window. The error code is a binary- weighted code. Any errors detected are summed and displayed in the FREQUENCY/MHz display window at the end of the seven@ test. The CLEAR key is used to exit the BITE tests.

The * key is used to erase the contents of the numbered memory channels. Each memory channel (1 through 99) is cleared when the 9, 9, 9 and * keys are pressed in the given sequence.

22.8.2.3 RF Frequency. The WJ-87 18A HF receiver is designed to receive and demodulate RF frequencies in the 5 kHz to 29.99999 MHz range. The receiver can be tuned in the local mode by using the general purpose keypad or the tuning wheel.

22.8.2.3.1 RF Frequency: Keypad Entry. To enter a tuned frequency from the keypad, the number is entered in order, from MSD to LSD, and terminatedwith kHz or MHz. An undetermined, undesired numerical entry can be cleared from the receiver’s internal circuits by engaging the CLEAR switch. As soon as the terminator is entered, the operation is complete and the CLEAR switch has no effect.

If the ENTRY FAULT LED glows after entry of an RF frequency, an invalid frequency has been entered. To disengage the FAULT light, reenter the desired frequency and terminate with kHz or MHz. Use of the kHz or MHz terminator is a matter of choice. For example, 123 kHz could be entered 1,2,3, kHz or decimal, 1,2, 3, MHz. In either case, the display will read 00.12300.

Entry of the decimal point is unnecessary if a whole number is entered. For example, to enter 4 MHz, press the digit 4 key and the MHz kev. The internal circuitrv will t&e care of the decimal and the display will reah 04.00000.

22.8.2.3.2 RF Frequency: Tuning Wheel Entry. The one-tinger tuning wheel on the microprocessor front panel can be used to dial the tuned RF frequency to a selected resolution. The tuning resolution switches are in the TUNE switch block to the right of the tuning wheel: FAST represents 1 -kHz increments, MED repre-

sents loo-Hz increments, and SLOW represents IO-Hz increments. Selection of a tuning resolution disengages the LOCK switch and the tuning wheel can be used to dial the frequency.

The tuning RF frequency display is decremented at the selected tuning resolution if the tuning wheel is rotated counterclockwise. It is incremented, at the selected tuning resolution, if the tuning wheel is rotated clockwise. Tuning past the end of the range (00.00000 to 29.9999 MHz) will cause the frequency to increment to the other end of the band and continue tuning in the same increasing or decreasing direction. The display will lock on the registered frequency when the LOCK button is engaged and the tuning wheel will be ineffective. The LOCK switch has no effect on the keypadRF frequency entry.

22.8.2.3.3 FREQUENCY/MHz Display. RF frequency is displayed by a 7-digit, ‘I-segment LED readout. As the frequency is entered, from MSD to LSD on the front panel keys, each digit is displayed in the LSB position and is displaced to the left one space with each new numerical entry. This calculator-style display re- flects all numerical entries to the general purpose keypad, except BFO frequency, until the terminator is entered.

22.8.2.4 BFO Frequency

22.8.2.4.1 BFO Frequency: Keypad Entry. To enter a BFO frequency from the keypad, the CWV and &BFO key must be engaged. An entered number between -8.00 and +8.00 is terminated with kHz and is displayed by the BFO display.

22.8.2.4.2 BFO Frequency: Tuning Wheel En- try. The one-finger tuning wheel can be used to dial a BFO frequency if the BFO and CWV switches are engaged. Selecting a tuning resolution from the TUNE switch block to the right of the wheel disengages the LOCK switch and allows the tuning wheel to dial a BFO frequency. The only effective tuning resolutions for BFO tuning are the lOO-Hz rate (FAST) and the IO-Hz rate (MED or SLOW). Rotating the wheel clockwise will increment the displayed frequency from a negative offset, through zero, to the upper limit of the range. Rotating the wheel counterclockwise will decrementthe displayed frequency from a positive offset, through zero, to the lower limit of the range.

22.8.2.4.3 fBF0 Offset Switch. The offset sign can be changed by the BFO f key. Pressing the key causes the minus (-) sign to be alternately displayed and removed. Absence of the sign on the display indicates positive offset.

ORIGINAL 22.32

NAVAIR Qi-75PAA-I.3

22.8.2.4.4 BFO OFWTHRS LVL Display. The SF0 tiequency is displayed by a 3digit, 7-segment, LED readout, with a minus sign (-). The BFO frequency can be entered locally t?om the keypad or tuning wheel. The BFO frequency range is ti.00 kHz and is displayed in kHz to a IO-Hz resolution. The LSD of the BFO OFQTHRS LVL display is also used to display dwell time and threshold levels.

22.8.2.5 Receiver Operating Parameters. Re- ceiver operating parameters are entered on fhe MFP switches and transferred to fhe receiver automatically. Parameters can be stored in memory using the STORE switch, and transferred to the receiver from memory using the RECALL switch. There are four selectable parameters: detection mode, IF bandwidth, RF gain (MGC only), and gain mode.

22.8.2.5.1 Detection Mode. Detection modes are selected by the AM, FM, USB, LSB, ISB, CWV (variable), and CWF (fixed) pushbuttons. The CWV switch is associated with the BFO switch and must he engaged to establish a new BFO frequency in the addressed receiver.

In the AM, FM, and CW modes, the line audio and phones audio are taken from fhe receiver’s AM, FM, and CW detectors, respectively. One of the five available bandwidths can be selected for AM, FM, and CW modes. The CWV switch enables the variable BFO. The CWF switch enables the fixed BFO (455 kHz). In the ISB mode, USB and LSB audios are available and can be monitored with stereo headphones.

22.8.2.5.2 IF Bandwidth. The IF BANDWIDTH/ kHz switch block allows selection of .3, 1, 3.2, 6, and 16 kHz IF bandwidths. In the AM, FM, and CW detection modes, any one of the five bandwidths should be selected. Bandwidth selection is ineffective in the USB, LSB, and ISB detection modes, when a sideband filter bandwidth of approximately 3 kHz is assumed. To indicate this, the LED on the 3.2 kHz IF bandwidth will glow.

22.8.2.5.3 Gain Mode. TheGAINMODEswitches are MGC, SLOW (AGC), and FAST (AGC). The differences in decay times of fast AGC and slow AGC make them useful for different kinds of signals. IO the tit AGC mode, the gain of the r&e&r adjusts about as quickly for a rise in signal strength (attack time) as it does for a fall in signal strength (decay time). Fast ACX attack and decay time is approximately 15 milliseconds for each. In the slow AGC mode, attack time is also fast, but decay time is approximately 2 seconds slower. For AM and FM signals, the total power in the carrier and sidebands dces not vary much with time at the transmitter. The main purpose for

AGC is to compensate for atmospheric losses; therefore, fast AGC is best for AM and FM signals. For pulsed signals, such as telegraphy and single sideband voice signals, there are rapid fluctuations in transmitted power with recurring peaks. When this type of signal is received, it is desirable that AGC attacks quickly and decays slowly; therefore, slow AGC is desirable for USB, LSB, and ISB signals.

When it is desirable to fix the gain, to make compari- sons of signal strength, or to eliminate signals or noise below a particular amplitude, fhe manual gain mode should be used. In this mode, the RF GAIN control can be engaged and should be adjusted so that the signal strength meter registers at the MAN SET line.

22.8.2.5.4 RF Gain Control. When the receiver is in the MGC mode, rotating the RF GAIN control clockwise approximates a linear increase in receiver gain. To obtain the greatest latitude for signal level change, engage the SIGNAL STR meter switch and set the gain control for an indication at fhe MAN SET mark on the meter.

22.8.2.8 Programmable Memory Channels

22.8.2.8.1 MEM ADRS Display. TheMFPac- cesses 99 channels of addressable memory in locations 1 through 99. Memory location is entered on the keypad and is terminated with RECALL or STORE. As soon as the terminator is entered, the address is displayed on the 2-digit, ‘I-segment LED MEM ADRS display. When terminator STORE is selected, the memory location is loaded with the receiver parameters registered on the front panel. When terminator RECALL is selected, the parameters in the recalled memory channel are transferred to the receiver.

Use of the EXAM key allows the contents of fhe numbered memory channels to be examined without affecting receiver operation. The EXAM key can be used to examine a selected memory channel or can be used 10 step sequentially through the numbered memory channels.

To examine the contents of a single memory channel, enter the memory address on the general purpose keypad before pressing the EXAM key. The contents of the addressed channel will be reflected by the front panel LEDs, but the receiver parameters will remain un- changed. The MEM ADRS display will blink on/off for the memory channel being examined.

To step sequentially through the numbered memory channels, press the EXAM key with no preceding memory address. The front panel LEDs will reflect

22-33 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

the contents of a memory channel, and the address of that channel will appear in the MEM ADRS display. The channel that is initially accessed is determined by the conditions in numerical sequence up to 99, then back to 1 again until the EXAM mode is released.

Activation of the CLEAR key releases the EXAM mode and restores the front panel LEDs to the receiver operating.parameters in effect before (and during) the EXAM procedure.

The * key is also used to clear the contents of the numbered memory channels. To perform this function, the activation of the * key must be preceded by an entry of 9,9,9 on the general purpose keypad.

22.8.2.8.2 100th Memory Channel. A 100th memory channel needs no keypad entry to be addressed. The channel is accessed by engaging the STORE or RE- CALL switches only (no numbered address). The MEM ADRS display goes blank to indicate the 100th channel access. The 100th memory channel provides the operator with a rapid access memory channel.

22.8.2.6.3 Scan Mode. The MFP memory scan capability allows the receiver to sequentially scan a selected group of memory channels. The memory locations are preloaded with receiver data.

During scan operation, the stored parameters of each memory channel are automatically recalled and transferred to the receiver. As each channel is recalled, the received signal strength is compared to a selected threshold level stored in that channel. When a channel is located where signal strength equals or exceeds the threshold level, the scanning operation stops for a selected dwell time, and then restarts automatically.

Pressing AUTO SCAN initiates a sequential scan of the memory channels. If none of the memory channels are locked out of the scan, the receiver scans through all channels except those reserved for frequency sector scan data storage (channels 87 through 99).

To omit a memory channel from the scan, enter the memory address on the keypad, then press the LOCK OUT key. To remove a group oflocations, enter the first and last numbers of the group on the keypad, separated by a decimal point. To restore a channel or channels, use the same procedure, except press LOCK OUT twice.

22.8.2.6.4 Signal Level Threshold. The threshold level is a level selected from scan modes, that is compared to signal strength. The comparison determines whether a signal is strong enough to be monitored. Threshold level is selectable from 0 to 9. To establish

threshold level, the number is entered on the keypad and terminated with THRS. The threshold level will be displayed in the LSD of the BFO OFSTHRS LVL display. Threshold level must be selected and stored inde pendently in each memory channel.

22.8.2.6.5 Dwell Time. IfAUTO SCAN mode is to be utilized, a dwell time must be selected. Dwell time is selectable from 0.1 to 8 seconds. A zero entry to the keypad selects 0.1 seconds, a 1 selects 1 second, a 2 selects 2 seconds, etc. The desired number is entered on the keypad and terminated with the DWELL pushbutton. The selected dwell time is automatically transferred to each memory channel. If dwell time is not selected, the 0.1 second dwell time will be assumed. In automatic scan mode, the prcloaded memory channels are sequentially scanned and the parameters transferred to the receiver. When an active channel is located (signal strength equal to or greater than threshold level) the scan locks at the active channel for the established dwell time and restarts automatically. If a dwell time of 9 is entered, the scan stops until restarted by pressing AUTO SCAN.

22.8.2.6.6 Handoff Operation. The HAND OFF switch is utilized during master/slave handoff operations. Master/slave operation is only possible with receivers that are equipped with the WJ-8718A/232M or WJ-8718A/488M remote control I/O option.

22.8.2.6.7 Fault Lights. The microprocessor front panel contains DATA, ENTRY, and RCVR fault indicators. The ENTRY fault indicator illuminates ifan invalid number or out-of-sequence entry has been made to the front panel switches. An invalid numerical entry could he any number outside of the terminating function. An out-of-sequence entry could be a terminator entry preceding a numerical entry. In either case, the light ceases to glow when a valid entry is made. The RCVR fault indicator glows red during operation if a power supply fault or LO unlocked signal is detected.

22.9 WING STORES CONTROL SYSTEM AND ANIALQ-170(V) SYSTEM

The CMSS ANIALQ-17O(V)l is a tracking radar transmitter and receiver that includes the CMSS pod, a C-l 1508/ALQ-170 controller-indicator, a video monitor, a PDI, and the PDI select panel. The CMSS provides the capability to search, acquire, and track a target in a manner simulating the performance of enemy threats. There are two controller-indicators at SS4 that support WSpylonsat WS 12 and WS 15. APDIandaPDI select panel are located at the pilot and copilot stations. For information specific to the AN/ALQ-170 system organ- izational maintenance and illustrated parts breakdown, refer to NAVAIR 16-30ALQl70-1.

ORIGINAL 22-34

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

22.9.1 Component Description. The CMSS is a three-channel monopulse radar system capable of utilizing different simulations in a given frequency band. Each simulation is contained in a SEM memory card and has the potential for five operator selectable options. In addition to the simulations, the operator can select the NAV mode that is a standardPP1 radar display. During transmission of a typical simulation, four modes of operation are available. These are SEARCH, AC- QUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISITION. In SEARCH mode, the antenna scans in an attempt to find a target. A joystick-operated cnrsor is available to aid the operator in searching. The ACQUISITION mode is engaged when a potential target is located. If the target is not valid, the CMSS returns to the SEARCH mode. If the target is valid, the CMSS locks into the TRACK mode. In TRACK mode the CMSS follows the target range and angle movements. If the CMSS loses the target while in the TRACK mode, a condition known as BREAK LOCK occurs. The CMSS moves into the RE- ACQUISITION mode and uses several methods to io- cate the lost target. If reacquisition is not successful, the CMSS returns to SEARCH mode. For control settings and functions, refer to Figure 22-27.

Note Observe all applicable cautions, warnings, and handling procedures for external wing stores as prescribed in NAVAIR Ol-75PA-75.

22.9.1.1 C-11509/ALQ-170(V) Controiier- indicator. Provides control for a specific wing station pylon system (WS 12 or WS 15). The contmller-indicator permits the operator to set the mode of operation for the AN/ALQ-170 pod and monitors system status information. There are two controller-indicators located at SS4 console, immediately below the dual video monitors. For control settings and functions, refer to Figures 22-27 and 22-28.

22.9.1.2 WV-5372A Dual Video Monitors. Dual video monitors, used to display AN/ALQ-170 radar video and system information, are mounted in a 19- inch rack directly above the controller-indicators (Figure 22-29). There are two 9-inch display monitors that connect to each AN/ALQ-170 system and the associated wing station pylon system (WS 12 or WS IS) (Figure 22-29). Both monitors are high-resolution black and white video monitors and operate on 120-Vat, 60- Ha power. Power is supplied through a control relay. The control relay is connected to an aneroid switch that will remove power to the unit when a decrease in cabin pressure is sensed. The relay, aneroid switch, and 60-Hz receptacle for each monitor is located directly behind the associated unit. A flip-down tray at the bottom of the

Figure 22-27. C-l 1508/ALQ-170(V) Controller-Indicator

rack provides access to both control panels. For control settings and functions, refer to Figure 22-30.

22.9.1.3 Position Display indicator. The PDI permits the flight station to monitor pod antenna position. There is a PDI for each system. One is located by the pilot glareshield and the other is located by the copilot glareshield.

22.9.1.4 PDI Select Panel. The PDI select panel permits either pilot or copilot to select between both WS pods, for information to be displayed on the PDI at their respectiveposition. TherearetwoPDIseiectpanels;one is located at the pilot side console and the other is at the copilot side console.

22.9.1.5 ANIALQ-170 Pod. The ANIALQ-170 CMSS pod is not addressed in the scope of this manual. For more information on system operation, tests, and equipmentsuppott,refertoNAVAIR 16-3OALQ-170-l.

22.9.1.6 UPW Wiring. The AN/ALQ-170(V) system interconnect wiring provides interconnection between AN/ALQ-170 countermeasures simulator pods at WS 12 or WS 15, video indicator and control indicator (SS4 console), auxiliary equipment, PDI and PDI select panels (pilot and copilot), ICS interface, and

22-35 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

CONTROUINDICATOR

loystick

‘OWER Switch

I(MIT Switch

LOCK ON Switch

SIM 1 through 4 Switches

HI TEMP Indicator

SYSTEM RESET Switch

FUNCTION

Located in the upper leh corner of the faceplate. Operation varies for different simulations, Typically, it can posttion a cursor on the display (and associated acquisition parameters) in range by up/down motion, and in azimuth by right/left motion. When pressed, it initiates some actton, e.g., search/acquisition transition. While in ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISITION modes, pressing the center returns the system to SEARCH. Also, when pressed, pages through text displayed on video monitor.

Supplies 115 Vat and 28 Vdc power to the system. Power must be ON at least 5 minutes before the transmitter will operate.

Energizes transmitter and initiates programmed search sequence for each simulation. Approximately 5 minutes after POWER ON, RDY light will illuminate when a SIM or NAV pushbutton is selected. When XMIT pushbutton is pressed, the XMIT/ON tllht illuminates.

Used to inhibii LOCK ON or to break lock once locked on. This pushbutton illuminates at LOCK ON. Pressing this pushbutton will break lock and return the system to SEARCH or ACQUISITION mode, depending on the simulation. Afler this pushbutton is pressed once from the TRACK state, the lock-on switch light flashes, indicating that the hi counter is disabled and system cannot LOCK ON. Pressing this pushbutton a second time restores normal operation.

When pressed while the system is in the idle state or SIM state (no transmit), a 20second snapshot of what is seen on the video monitor will be recorded. The ON light illuminates when the system is recording. When the system is transmitting in a SIM state or NAV state, the recorder and ON light turn on automatically. In the NAV state or SIM state (while transmitting), the recorder may be powered on or off at the operator’s discretion by pressing the RECORD switch. The recorder turns on automatically when a calibrate or test is finished. The recorder also turns on automatically for a short time to record the idle state test display when the idle state test is invoked.

Any of these pushbuttons place the system in a SIM state in which a set of preprogrammed parameters is invoked to govern the details of the system’s SEARCH, ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISITION performance. Selection of a SIM pushbutton will determine the exact function of the joystick, LOCK ON pushbutton, and RANGE, AZIMUTH, and ELEVATION potentiometers, as well as details of the display in each operating mode. When a SIM pushbutton has been selected, the ON light is illuminated on that simulation, and the OPTION pushbuttons corresponding to those options that have been programmed illuminate. Selection of a SIM pushbutton causes a text describing that simulation to appear on the video monitor. Pressing a SIM key a second time exits the system from the SIM state to the IDLE state.

A warning light that indicates an abnormally high temperature at some location in the CMSS group OH-S4/ALQ-17001) when temperature reaches 158 “F. This indication is normally accompanied by a warning message on the video monitor. No operator action is associated with this key other than a decision on terminating simulator operation.

Returns the system to the IDLE state; i.e., to the state it was in after power turn-on, with the exception that the 5-minute warmup time is not reset. Thus, if the XMIT RDY light has been illuminated, itwill stay lit when the SYSTEM RESET is pressed. The SYSTEM RESET pushbutton may be used when some anomaly in display or operation is noticed.

Figure Z-28. C-l 1508 Controller-Indicator Controls and Indicators (Sheet 1 of 3)

ORIGINAL 22-36

NAVAIR OI-75PAA-I.3

CONTROlJtNDlCATOR

AMP TEST Switch

IPTION 1 through 5 switches

IPTION 1 IPTION 2 IPTION 3 IPTION 4 IPTION 5

ELEVATION Potentiometer

IIM Potentiometer

VIMUTH Potentiometer

?ANGE Potentiometer

:ALIB Switch

FUNCTION

Checks operation of all lamps on the controller-indicator front panel. When it is pressed, all legends except the POWER OFF legend illuminate.

When any simulation is selected, the options that have been programmed will illuminate, with the OFF legend illuminated. When an OPTION is selected, the ON legend will illuminate. An OPTION is deselected by pressing the same pushbutton a second time. OPTIONS are only selected or deselected while the system is in a SIM state. More than one OPTION may be selected at a time.

Features related to elevation angle. Features related to angular tracking. Features related to range tracking. Features related to search, acquisition, and reacquisition. Other features, oflen related to gate structure.

Controls some simulation-dependent, elevation-related function, often control of an antenna elevation position in SEARCH, ACQUISITION, and/or REACQUISITION modes.

Controls brightness of indicator lamps.

Controls some simulation-dependent, azimuth-related function. In the NAV mode, with OPTION 2 selected, this potentiometer allows manual control of antenna azimuth position.

Controls some simulation-dependent, range-related function, e.g., the extent of range on video monitor. The range potentiometer also controls the range display in the NAV mode.

The CALIB function performs the antenna calibration and system calibration for any selected simulation, The CALIB light illuminates when any SIM pushbutton is pressed. Before a calibration, the tester- calibrator TS-4126/ALQ1700/) frequency should be set via the dial on the status tester-indicator to approximately 500. When CALIB switch is pressed. a preprogrammed calibration run lasting 3 to 4 minutes is begun. During the antenna calibration, the antenna increments through AZ/EL positions (-30, -15) (-20, -IO), (-10, -5) (0.0) (+10, +5). (+20. +lO), (+30, +15) degrees resting at each for 2 seconds. A GO or NO GO indication is given beneath the CALIB lamp for each of the antenna positions. A NO GO indicates that the commanded antenna gimbal position was not equal to the actual antenna gimbal position. During the system calibration, the target signal is injected, and stepped attenuation values are inserted decreasing at programmed time intervals as power increases. These attenuation levels are shown on the display. At lock-on, the LOCK indication on the video display appears. When the calibration run completes, a GO or NO GO appears beneath the CALIB legend for two seconds. A GO indication shows that the system calibration has passed. A NO GO indication shows either a failure to lock on or lock on at a signal level higher than the required system sensitivity. Afler the CALIB segment stops flashing, the GO light will be illuminated if both antennas calibrate and the system calibrate passed, otherwise the NO GO lamp will be illuminated.

Figure 22-28. C-l 1508 Controller-Indicator Controls and Indicators (Sheet 2 of 3)

22-37 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

T”,“U I I”,”

Allows a set of built-in tests to be performed, depending on the state the system is in. ATEST may ba performed from the IDLE state or from the SIM (no XMIT) state. When power or reset is depressed, a GO or a NO GO indication is given beneath the TEST legend by controller-indicator C-l 1508/ALQ-17001). This indicates that the controller-indicator is operating correctly. Pressing TEST in IDLE state causes BIT group 100, that enables tests for the AID converter- controller CV-3907/ALQ-170(V), to be run. A GO indication signifies that all test results within group 100 have passed. The option 1 and option 2 lamps will also come on for 2 seconds when TEST is pressed in the IDLE state. Option 1 and option 2 should not be pressed during this 2-second period. The options have been provided for NRL evaluation. The operator should press RESET, if either of these options have been selected during IDLE state TEST.

Pressing TEST in SIM state allows a preprogrammed short calibration to be performed. The calibration is short, because step attenuation levels are begun close to lock-on level. A NO GO indication signifies either a failure to lock on or lock on at a signal level higher than the required system senslvity.

NAV Switch Enters the system into the NAV state.

Figure 22-28. C-l 1508 Controller-Indicator Controls and Indicators (Sheet 3 of 3)

power circuits. Umbilical cables are permanently installed in the WS 12 and WS 15 pylons.

Connectors for auxiliary equipment are mounted in the kick panel under the table at the TAC/EWO station. Receptacle covers are installed on these connectors since the auxiliary equipment is not normally installed.

A pylon umbilical cable (muted through the pylon, out the tailcone faring, to the pod) connects power, auxiliary, and control wiring from fhe WS bracket connectors to the pod. When not in use, these connectors are stowed on dummy receptacles mounted inside the tailcone faring. All connections to the pod are made using a lanyard type, quick-release connector. The landyard is a part of the umbilical cable and is connected to the pylon during flight. This provides quick disconnect without damage should it become necessary to jettison a pod during flight.

Failure to attach the umbilical cable connector lanyard prior to flight could result in damage to the pod, umbilical cable, and pylon.

The universal pylon wiring for the AN/ALQ-170(V) system comprises the equipment listed in Figure 22-3 1

by nomenclature, part number, and location. All other parts of the AN/ALQ-170(V) system interconnect wiring are hard-mounted to the airframe.

22.9.1.7 Power Distribution. Primary power is routed from the main load center dc limiter bus and ac bus A through the wing stores power relay to the mission circuitbnzakerpanellocatedatbay45.Poweristhenrouted t?om the AN/ALQ170 system circuit breaker (mission circuit breaker panel) through the pressure deck connector and through the leading edge of each wing to the WS 12 or WS 15 bracket power connector.

pii-

To prevent injury to personnel or damage to equipment, ensure all external stores are safe and use extreme care when applying power to the AN/ALQ-I 70 equipment.

Note

Unless the armament safety circuit is disabled, ac and dc power provided to the AN/ALQ-I70 circuit breakers will be deenergized when the landing gear handle is placed in the down position (refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-2-26).

ORIGINAL 22-38

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Figure 22-29. Dual Video Monitors

The following circuit breakers apply power to the AN/ALQ-170 system and associated pylons:

a. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker; located at the armament circuit breaker panel, forward left electronics rack.

b. WING STORES PWR RLY circuit breaker; located at the armament circuit breaker panel, forward left electronics rack.

C. PDI SELECT circuit breaker; located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

d. POSN 12 and POSN 15 circuit breakers, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

22.9.2 System Operation. Operating procedures for the AN/ALQ-170 system are contained in the technical manual, operators instructions, countermeasures simulator set, AN/ALQ-170(V) publication.

22.10 VHS VCR EQUIPMENT


22.10.1.1 VHS VCR Unit. The VHS VCR is commercial equipment that provides training mission case storage for radar images obtained by the SS3 operator. The VHS recorder is located at SS2 because of the lack of available space at the SS3 console. Control and operation of the VCR unit will be performed with the remote control, also located at the SS2 console.

22.10.1.2 Remote Control Unit. The RCU is a battery-operated hand-held unit that provides all the controls for the VHS VCR. The RCU is stored directly above the VHS VCR in a recessed panel at SS2.

22.10.2 System Operation

22.10.2.1 VHS VCR Control. Pressing CB4 on the 60-Hz circuit breaker panel provides power to the 60-Hz receptacle at SSl/SS2 for the VHS recorder.

1. The following controls and indicators are used to operate the VHS VCR from the remote control:

a. POWER indicator - Flickers when an operation button is pressed on the remote control.

b. Wireless remote sensor - Receives the signal from the wireless remote control.

c. VCR/TV selector - Selects the signal source to be monitored or recorded. Select VCR for operation with the RMS system. When VCR is selected, VCR will be shown on multifunction display.

d. EJECT button - Removes a cassette in the stop mode.

e. Power button - Turns VCR on and off. Used to set the VCR for unattended recordings or standby OTRs.

f. RECALL button - Displays or clears the time counter, date, time, function and channel number.

g. MONITOR button - Displays the TV channel currently tuned. Press again to resume playback’from the still mode.

h. REWIND/SEARCH button - Rewinds tapes. Also, during playback press this button to view the picture in rapid reverse.

i. STILL ADVANCE button - Advances the picture frame-by-frame in still mode for tapes recorded in SP or SLP. Also, press this button in playback mode to rapidly scan over several seconds of tape.

j. PAUSE/STILL button - Temporarily stops tape while recording or to view a still picture during playback.

k. REC button - Records.

1. CLOCK/COUNTER button - Selects the clock or time counter in the multifunction display.

22-39 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Sync selector switch

H. AFC switch

Ready jack

Focus

Video output connector @NC)

Video input connector @NC)

Video termination switch

urce of sync and boosts picture quality

ShorVlong; selects a short or long time constant for VTR playback.

Permits unit to integrate with alarm activated systems.

Variable control for display focus.

Permits access to system video for auxiliary use.

Provides the input for the video signal.

Selects the appropriate video termination impedance.

Figure 22-30. Video Monitor Controls

m. COUNTER MEMORY button - Turns the memory stop feature on and off.

n. CLEAR/RESET button - CLEAR button clears the contents of a displayed program. RE- SET button resets the time counter when it is displayed.

o. BOOK MARK SEARCH button - Locates beginning of a blank portion of tape for continuous recording.

p. STANDBY button - Used along with the OTR button to set delayed (standby) OTRs.

q. One touch record button - Starts an instan- taneous recording from 30 minutes to 4 hours (or up to the end of the tape). Power shutoff is automatic.

r. TRACKING/V-LOCK control - Tracking control is used during playback or double speed playback if the image is partially ob- scured by bands of noise. V-lock control locks out vertical jitter in SP or SLP still mode.

s. Front panel door - Slide this door down to expose the function controls.

t. VCR/TV selector - Selects the signal source that your TV receives. VCR position: to view playback, to monitor video recordings or watch TV using the VCR tuner. VCR appears in the multitimction display. TV position: to watch TV or to view one program while recording another. When set to TV, no indicator lights in the multifunction display.

ORIGINAL 22-40

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

PDI Select Panel I 91050137-001 I Copilot Side Console

Figure 22-3 1. AN/ALQ-170(V) System Interconnect Wiring Components

u. CHANNEL UP/DOWN keys - Selects the aa. Slow-motion buttons - SLOW button slows desired channel using the VCR tuner. Can also motion playback of tapes recorded in SP or be used to clear or reset items in a displayed SLP. The up/down buttons let you adjust the program. speed from about l/5 to l/60 the normal speed.

v. CHANNEL SEARCH button - Scans channels assigned to the CHANNEL UP/DOWN keys. When the desired channel appears, press again to select it.

bb. REPEAT button - Repeats playback of a continuously recorded portion of tape.

w. PLAY button - Plays back a tape.

cc. PROG/CLOCK button - Displays menu screen, setting clock, channel memory, and timer recording.

x. FAST FORWARD/SEARCH button - Rapidly advances the tape. Also, during playback press this button to do a rapid forward visual search.

dd. Numbered keys (0, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, and 9) - Selects the VCR tuner channels. Also, use these keys when making a selection from an OSD. (100): Press this button first when selecting channels 100 through 125.

y. STOP button - Stops the tape.

z. Double speed (X2) playback button - Used during playback with tapes recorded in SP or SLP mode to search forward at twice the normal speed.

ee. TIME/SEARCH button - Allows you to skip back or ahead on a tape.

ff. ADD/DELETE button - Adds or deletes a channel from the current channel memory.

22-41 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

Lx.

hh.

INPUT button - Press this button for the desired input to the VCR. Tuner, for regular TV or cable TV recording. Line, for re-recording or camera recording. TUNER or LINE will appear for a few seconds on the TV screen when this button is pressed.

Tape speed selector (SP/LP/SLP) - Set this selector to the desired recording speed: standard play, long play, or super long play.

22.10.2.2 Multifunction Display. The MFD permits the operator to monitor system status indicators in all modes of operation.

1. Function Indicators - A character display in the upper left-hand comer of the MFD and the associated REC indicator shows the direction of tape travel and the following conditions:

a. Play, double speed play

b. Rewind, rewind/search

c. Fast forward, fast forward search

d. Record

e. Record/pause

f. Still

g. Slow, still advance

h. Eject.

2. Cassette-in indicator - An iconic symbol between the function indicator and the REC indicator. When the symbol is not showing, there is no cassette in the VCR. When the symbol is showing, there is a cassette in the VCR. When the symbol is flashing, automatic rewind took place at the end of the tape during playback, recording, or fast forward. The indicator continues flashing until the next mode is selected. Also, the indicator flashes if you attempt any recording when the cassette record tab is missing.

3. TIMER indicator - Indicates the VCR is set for a timer recording, standby OTR, or instant OTR.

4. REPEAT indicator - From playback or any special effect, you can repeat playback with the REPEAT button. When you press this button, playback continues to the end of the recorded section of the tape. The tape will then auto rewind to

the beginning of the tape and will repeat playback. Pressing the REPEAT or another function will stop auto playback.

5. Speed indicator SP, LP, SLP - Shows the tape speed during recording or playback.

6. VCR/TV indicator VCR - Appears when the VCR/TV selector is set to VCR.

7. Memory indicator M - Indicates memory control is in use.

8. Clock/timer counter display - Displays the current time or time counter.

9. Channel Display 188 - The CHANNEL number selected at the VCR is displayed. An L will appear when you select a line input.

22.11 MD-1203/ULT AUDIO MODULATOR SYSTEM

The audio modulator system consists of two MD- 1203 audio modulators (Figure 22-32). Selected modulation signals from MD-1203 No. 1 are routed through the in-flight communicator station AUX ICS control to the HF 1 radio (Channel 1) and HF 2 radio (Channel 2). Selected modulation signals from MD-1203 No. 2 (Channel 1) are routed through SS 1 to the mission UHF 3 and UHF 4 radios and to USQ-113 transmitter No. 1. Selected modulation signals from MD-1203 No. 2 (Channel 2) are routed through SS2 to the mission UHF (3 through 6) radios and to USQ-113 transmitter No. 2. The MD-1203 audio modulator selectable modulating output signal types are both simple and complex wave shapes, including tone, bagpipe, noise, and morse code.

22.11.1 Component Description. The MD-1203 is a dual enclosure unit that houses identical modulators. The MD-1203KlLT audio modulator is a single chassis component. The chassis contains the power supply, waveform generators, amplifiers, and control circuits necessary to provide the desired functions. Transmit control is provided from the keying circuit of the associated HF or UHF transmitter when the MODE switch is set to the JAM position.

22.11.1.1 Power Distribution. The MD-12031 ULT audio modulators require 115 Vat, 47 to 440 HZ input power. To apply power to MD-1203 NO. 1 and MD-1203 NO. 2, press the following circuit breakers:

1. MD-1203 No.1 circuit breaker, located at the forward left electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

ORIGINAL 2242

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

2. MD-1203 No.2 circuit breaker, located at the mission power circuit breaker panel, bay 45.

22.11.2 System Operation. The MD-1203/ULT audio modulator front panel contains all operating controls and indicators. Figures 22-32 and 22-33 illustrate and define the front panel controls and indicators. All controls and indicators are duplicated for channel 1 and channel 2 except the POWER switch and VOLUME control.

The MD-1203 modes of operation include the following:

1. Speaker output and jamming

2. Fixed frequency tones

3. White noise

4. Square wave and sawtooth wave frequency modulation and deviation

5. Bagpipe simulator

6. Morse code simulator.

Note

The simultaneous-operation lockout circuit in the dual HF system prevents keying of both HF transmitters at the same time.

22.11.2.1 Speaker Output and Jamming. To monitor fhe modulating tone on the MD-1203 dual modulator:

1. Switch the JAM/OFF/MONITOR switch to the MONITOR position.

2. Adjust volume for a comfortable listening level.

To transmit generated tones:

1. Switch the JAM/OFF/MONITOR switch to JAM.

22.1122 Fixed Frequency Tone Generation. To generate a fixed frequency tone:

1. Set TONE/BAGPIPE SELECT control to TONE

2. Rotate clockwise, one or more offhe six GENER- ATOR controls to increase signal gain (400,600, 1100,1800,3000, LINK).

3. Rotating any of the GENERATOR controls full counterclockwise will deselect that tone.

22.11.2.3 White Noise Generation. White noise can be generated separately or added to any combination of fixed frequency tones.

1. To enable or increase the amplitude of noise, turn the NOISE control clockwise.

22.11.2.4 Square Wave and Sawtooth Wave Frequency Modulation and Deviation. Any of the five fixed frequencies can be frequency modulated and deviated with a square waveform or sawtooth waveform or both.

1. When operating in the fixed frequency mode, under SQUARE WAVE and/or SAWTOOTH WAVE, rotate RATE and DEV controls clockwise. Rotating these controls clockwise will increase the modulation and frequency deviation to the desired level.

22.11.2.5 Bagpipe Simulation. To select bagpipe simulation:

1. Set TONE/BAGPIPE control to BAGPIPE. Fixed frequency and LINK controls are disabled in fhe BAGPIPE mode.

2. Rotate BAGPIPE RATE control to the desired se- quencing rate.

Figure 22-32. MD-1203NLT Modulator Front Panel Controls and Indicators

22-43 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Oi-15PAA-1.3

CONTROL FUNCTION

SQUARE WAVE RATE DEV

SAWTOOTH WAVE RATE DEV

3UTPUT LEVEL

?G Xl/x20

3ENERATORS 400 600 1100 1800 3000 NOISE LINK

RATE JAM/OFF/ MONITOR

TONE/BAGPIPE SELECT Switch RATE

MORSE ON/OFF

MORSE DATA SELECT

POWER

VOLUME

Controls square wave modulation rate to tone generators. Controls amount of square wave deviation of tone generators.

Controls sawtooth wave modulation rate to tone generators. Controls amount of wave deviation of tone generations.

Indicates RMS output amplitude level.

A two-position toggle switch: selects meter level range control.

Controls amplitude level of 400-Hz output in TONE mode. Controls amplitude level of 600-Hz output in TONE mode. Controls amplitude level of 1 lOO-Hz output in TONE mode. Controls amplitude level of 1800-Hz output in TONE mode. Controls amplitude level of 3000-Hz output in TONE mode. Controls amplitude level of noise output in TONE mode. Controls amplitude level of 2915Hz output in TONE mode.

A three-position toggle switch: controls output to speaker and jamming function.

A two-position rotary switch: selects TONE or BAGPIPE mode. Controls rate of BAGPIPE mode sequence.

A two-position toggle switch: selects MORSE CODE mode ON/OFF.

A 18-pushbutton keypad: controls MORSE CODE mode operations.

A pushbutton switch (indicator): provides primary power on/off control.

Controls front panel speaker volume on channel 1 and channel 2.

Figure 22-33. MD-1203/ULT Modulator Front Panel Controls and Indicators

22.11.2.6 Morse Code Simulation. To simulate morse code:

5. To change the WPM, press the asterisk (*) button, enter any two-digit number from 02 to 60 and press the crosshatch (#) button.

1. Set the MORSE ON/OFF switch to ON for Chan- nel 1 or Channel 2.

2. To use the morse code generator exclusively, rotate the five fixed frequency GENERATOR controls, LINK control, and NOISE control fully counterclockwise.

6. To change the CPW, press D, enter any two-digit number from 03 to 06 and press the crosshatch (#) button.

22.12 UNIVERSAL PYLON WIRING

3. Set TONE/BAGPIPE control to TONE.

4. At the MORSE DATA SELECT keypad, press the crosshatch (#) button to set the morse data at a default setting of 10 WPM and 3 CPW.

The UPW provides a means of interconnect for the AST-4, AST-6, ALE-43, or ALQ-167 pods at the wing station pylons. The AST-4, AST-6, ALE-43, or ALQ- 167 pods are not part of the EP-3J aircraft configuration but may be installed as auxiliary systems. WS 9,10,11, 12, 15, 16, 17, and 18 are patched to the WW console patch panel at bay 17. The patch panel routes the eight

ORIGINAL 22-44

sets of UPW cables to NAViEWO console for any combination of the aforementioned pods.

22.12.1 System Description. The UPW system provides control signals and operating voltages between the wing station pod systems and their respective controllers. From the WS bracket, the pylon segments of both power and control wiring are routed through the pylon to the bracket positioned inside the tailcone fairing. An umbilical cable that is specific to the pod being used, provides connection between the pod and bofh control and power wiring harnesses at the pylon disconnect bracket. All connections to the pod are made using a lanyard type, quick-disconnect connector. The lanyard is a part of the umbilical cable and is connected to the pylon during flight. This enables quick release without damage, should it become necessary to jettison the pod in flight.

The selected system controller connects to a rear console bracket using an adapter cable that is peculiar to the controller. There are four WS patch panels supporting eight UPW connector sets (IUPW through SJF’W and 8UPW through IOUPW), located at NAV/EWO in support of the pods. From the rear console bracket, the control wiring is routed to the patch panel at bay 17, where connections are made to the desired wing station UPW or a dummy receptacle. The wing station wiring is routed from the patch panel to the pressure deck and out through the leading edge, to each of the wing station bracket power connectors.

22.12.2 Power Distribution. Primary power is provided to the mission circuit breaker panel, at bay 45, from the main load center (dc limiter bus and ac bus A), via the wing stores power relay (ref. NAVAIR Ol- 75PAA-2-26). The control voltage for the wing stores power relay is supplied from the ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker located at the forward left electronics rack circuit breaker panel. Each wing station is supplied power from a IO-amp ac circuit breaker and a IO-amp dc circuit breaker on the mission circuit breaker panel. The powerwiring for each wing station is routed from the mission circuit breaker panel to the pressure deck connector. From the pressure deck connector, the power wiring is then routed through fhe leading edge, to each of the six wing station bracket power connectors.

During normal in-flight operations, ac and dc power provided to the UPW circuit breakers may be deenergized when the landing gear

NAVAIR 0%75PAA.1.3

handle is placed in the down position, unless the armament safety circuit is disabled (ref. NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-2-26). Proper measures should be taken to prevent possible damage to equipment or injury to personnel.

22.12.3 System Operation. An adapter and umbilical cable, peculiar to the system being connected, is used to complete the interconnect at both the console and the pod. When not in use, these cables should be stowed safely inside fhe aircraft.

The ALE-43 is the only controller that must be connected to a specific rear console bracket. This is because of fhe 5-volt lighting power requirement that is provided only at 9UPW and IOUPW. These brackets are located at the lower aft NAV console area and are the only brackets that face forward, rather than inboard. All other rear console brackets have 18-volt lighting provisions. All other auxiliary controllers may be installed at any position.

ALE-43 controllers that are connected to rear console brackets other than 9UPW and 1OUPW may be damaged.

Note

The 18-volt receptacles at NAV/EWO console are placarded with a CAUTION statement to preclude installing an ALE-43 controller at these positions.

The system controller in use mates with rear console bracket J2 and J3 connectors using an adapter cable that is system peculiar. The J3 connector is used only for controller lighting. Control signals &om rear console bracket 52 connector are routed to the P4 connector on the patch panel. Any of the eight rear console bracket P4 connectors can be mated with any of the six wing station 54 connectors. This allows up to 48 different configuration possibilities, but only six may be connected at one time. Control signals from the patch panel 54 connector are routed to the JS pressure deck connector. The control signals are then routed !?om the PS pressure deck connector to the WS bracket 57 connector. Signals from WS bracket P7 connector are then routed through fhe pylon to the J9 connector located inside the tailcone fairing. Connections are then made from J9 to the system pod with the appropriate umbilical cable.

22-45 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA.1.3

To apply power to the wing station pylons, close the applicable circuit breakers located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

Failure to attach the umbilical cable connector lanyard prior to flight could result in damage to the pod, umbilical cable, and pylon.

22.13 B2 RADAR SIMULATOR SYSTEM

The B’ Radar Simulator System (B*) is a pulse generator with unique PRF characteristics. Output impedance, pulse amplitude, pulse width, rise time, and load driving capability are comparable with requirements of the AN/APS-80 radar system. The B* provides outputs to trigger the FMS indicator and both radar modulators to alter the normal radiating characteristics of the AN/APS-80 radar. The B* system B* control selects either the normal AN/APS-80 PRF of 390 to 420 PPS or an altered PRF. This is accomplished by routing the two required outputs from the SN-234/APS-80 synchronizer through a relay in the unit. Therefore, no cable reconfiguration is required during flight. Cable provisions for the B* control are located at SS3 console and for the FEWSG B* unit at bay 11.

22.13.1 Component Description. The equipment as installed in the EP-3J, interfaces with the ANlAPS- radarsystemandconsistsoftheB*controllocatedat SS3 and the B* unit located at bay 11.

22.13.1 .l B2 Control. The B* control box consists of a six-position pushbutton switch assembly with illuminated caps. The switches are mechanically interlocked so that the one pushed last remains pressed and all others are released. The caps are independently illuminated to indicate status.

22.13.1.2 B2 Simulator. Modifications have been incorporated to the B2 unit to accept an external PRF trigger from an SG-1189/AST-4 control. This permits the PRF of the APS-80 to be varied in flight. A BNC- type connector and a toggle switch have been added to the top of the B* unit. When operated in the B2 mode, the INT position of the switch selects the usual B* output signal. The EXT position selects the variable PRF provided by the SG-1189/AST-4 control via the BNC connector.

Providing a variable PRF for the AN/APS-80 radar poses a significant risk of damage to the radar equipment. Ensure that only qualified personnel operate this equipment.

22.13.2 8’ Control Functions, Controls, and Indicators. The six switches can be divided into two groups; the left three are associated with the radar mode and the right three are associated with the simulation mode. For control settings and functions, refer to Figure 22-34.

22.13.3 Power Distribution. To apply power to the B* radar simulator system, press the 28-Vdc B2 circuit breaker, located at the mission circuit breaker panel.

22.13.4 System Operation. With the B* control in NORM (radar mode), signals are routed unintenupted through the normally closed contacts ofrelays inside the unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse is routed from SN-234/ APS-80 radar synchronizer to the B* unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse then is routed from the B* unit to both the forwardandaftradarmodulators (in parallel). SYNC signals are routed from SN-234/APS-80 radar synchronizer to the B* unit. The SYNC signals are then routed from the B2 unit to the C-12272 (RMS indicator).

With the BZ control in simulation mode, SYNC signals and the MOD TRIGGER pulse are outputted directly to the forward and aft radar modulators and to the RMS indicator.

Do not alter PRF on AU-4 control box during RF transmission as damage to equipment may occur.

22.14 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR STATION

The in-flight communicator is responsible for the proper preflight and operation of all equipment assigned to him. The primary mission of the in-flight communicator is to operate HF 1, HF 2, and HF 3 communication systems as directed by the mission commander. As configured on this model aircraft, HF 1 and HF 2 may transmit and receive voice audio or MD-1203 modulated audio. HF 3 is an HF scanner monitored on the AUX ICS. The in-flight communicator can monitor UHF 1, UHF 2, V/UHF, HF 1, HF 2, MAIN ICS left and right audio, and MD-1203 left and right audio on the

ORIGINAL 22-46

NAVAIR Ol-l!iPAA-1.3

CONTROL FUNCTION

Radar Mode (LH three switches)

OFF The radar transmitter is inhibited, trigger pulse is removed from the modulator. Used during transition from normal AN/APSJO parameters to simulated parameters. Operator sees two distinct

When radar is turned on, it will operate in normal parameters. It is

is switch is pushed in conjunction with one of the RH three , and the radar is operating, itwill radiate in simulated

Figure 22-34. B2 Control Function Select Switches

AUX ICS. The in-flight communicator may also receive andtransmitonUHF l,UHF2,V/LJHF,HF 1,andHF 2 systems as selected on the master ICS control. He will also request the position report 10 minutes prior to the time the report is due, authenticate/challenge messages, maintain radio logs as directed by the communications doctorine/controlling activity, and act as an observer as directed. He will also be required to scan for, and target, mission specific frequencies as directed by the TAC/EWO. Additionally, he shall be prepared to transmit emergency messages at any time.

22.14.1 WJ-8718 HF 3 Scan Receiver Control. HF 3 comprises a WJ-8718Ascan receiverandan active blade HF antenna for standalone operation. HF 3 audio is accessible to the operator on the AN/AK-22 system and fhe AUX ICS system.

22.14.1.1 Component Description. The WJ-8718A HF receiver is designed to receive and demodulate RF tiequencies in the 5-kHz to 29.999~MHz range. The receiver can be tuned in the local mode by using the general purpose keypad or the tuning wheel. The WJ- 87 18AiMFP (microprocessor front panel) option allows local digital control of all HF 3 receiver parameters while providing access to 100 programmable memory channels. Local control of the receiver is accomplished through momentaty-contact pushbutton switches ar-

ranged in functional blocks on the WJ-8718AiMFP front panel.

22.14.1.2 Power Requirements. Applypowerto the WJ-8718A scan receiver and associated antenna by pressing the DC HF 3 and WJ-87 18 PRE-AMP circuit breaker, located at the forward left electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

22.14.1.3 Operation. Receiver operating parameters are entered on the MFP switches and transferred to the receiver automatically. Parameters can be stored in a memory using the STORE switch, and transferred to the receiver from memory using fhe RECALL switch. There are four selectable parameters: detection mode, IF bandwidth, RF gain (MGC only), and gain mode.

22.14.1.3.1 Detection Mode. Detection modes are selected by the AM, FM, USB, LSB, ISB, CWV (variable), and CWF (fixed) pushbuttons. The CWV switch is associated with the BFO switch and must be engaged to establish a new BFO frequency in the addressed receiver.

In the AM, FM, and CW modes, the line audio and phones audio are taken from the receiver’s AM, FM, and CW detectors, respectively. One of the five available bandwidths can be selectdd for AM, FM, and CW

22.47 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

modes. The CWV switch enables the variable BFO. The CWF switch enables the fixed BFO (455 kHz). In the ISB mode, USB and LSB audios are available and can be monitored with stereo headphones.

22.14.1.3.2 IF Bandwidth. The IF BANDWIDTH/ kHz switch block allows selection of .3, 1, 3.2, 6, and 16 kH.z IF bandwidths. In the AM, FM, and CW detection modes, any one of the five bandwidths should be selected. Bandwidth selection is ineffective in the USB, LSB, and ISB detection modes, when a sideband filter bandwidth of approximately 3 kHz is assumed. To indicate this, the LED on the 3.2 kH.z IF bandwidth will glow.

22.14.1.3.3 Gain Mode. The GAIN MODE switches are MGC (manual gain control), SLOW (AGC), and FAST (AGC). The differences in decay times of fast AGC and slow AGC make them useful for different kinds ofsignals. In the fast AGC mode, the gain ofthe receiver adjusts about as quickly for a rise in signal strength (attack time) as it does for a fall in signal strength (decay time). Fast AGC attack and decay time is approximately 15 milliseconds for each. In the slow AGC mode, attack time is also fast, but decay time is approximately 2 seconds slower. For AM and FM signals, the total power in the carrier and sidebands does not vary much with time at the transmitter. The main purpose for AGC is to compensate for atmospheric losses; therefore, fast AGC is best for AM and FM signals. For pulsed signals, such as telegraphy and single sideband voice signals, there are rapid fluctuations in transmitted power with recurring peaks. When this type of signal is received, it is desirable that AGC attacks quickly and decays slowly; therefore, slow AGC is desirable for USB, LSB, and ISB signals.

When it is desirable to fix the gain, to make compari- sons of signal strength, or to eliminate signals or noise below a particular amplitude, the manual gain mode should be used. In this mode, the RF GAIN control can be engaged and should be adjusted so that the signal strength meter registers at the MAN SET line.

22.14.1.3.4 RF Gain Control. When the receiver is in the MGC mode, rotating the RF GAIN control clockwise approximates a linear increase in receiver gain. To obtain the greatest latitude for signal level change, engage the SIGNAL STR meter switch and set the gain control for an indication at the MAN SET mark on the meter.

22.14.1.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. To remove power to the HF 3 system in an emergency situation, pull the DC HF 3 and WJ-8718 PRE-AMP

circuit breaker, located at the forward let? electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

22.14.2 AN/ARC-190 HF Radio System. Each AN/ARC-190 system comprises an RT-1341/ARC- 190(V) receiver/transmitter, a C-10828/ARC-190(V) control, an MT-6142AIARC-190(V) mount/modulator, a lightning arrestor, and a CU-2275/ARC-190(V) antenna coupler. There are two HF radio systems, HF 1 and HF 2. HF 1 and HF 2 audio is accessible on the AN/AIC-22 system and the AUX ICS control unit.

22.14.2.1 Component Description

22.14.2.1.1 Receiver/Transmitter RT-1341 (V)3/ARC-190(V). There are two R/T’s: HF 1 is located at bay 43 and HF 2 is located at bay 15. The R/T transmits and receives on any one of 280,000 frequencies spaced at loo-Hz increments. Frequencies are derived from a temperature compensated crystal oscillator and digital frequency synthesizer. The receiver section uses dual conversion with crystal bandpass filters to decrease effects from strong interference signals, Oper- ating modes, frequency, volume, squelch, and preset channel are microprocessor-controlled by inputs from the radio set control. In transmit, the radio set is capable of delivering 400-watts peak envelope power or 400- watts average power with a continuous duty cycle. Power-amplifier circuits are automatically protected from overload, short circuit, and overheat by built in protection circuits. The receiver and transmitter are both automatically tuned to the same frequency. The receiver is tuned by the fast-lock synthesizer in 10 milliseconds or less. Typically, the transmitter tunes to a manually- selected frequency in 1 second and to a preset channel frequency in 35 milliseconds. One conventional tune cycle is required for the system to respond to the code for a preset channel frequency.

22.14.2.1.2 Control Panel C-10828(V)2/ARC- 190(V). Both radio set controls @IF 1 and HF 2) are located at the IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR console. The radio set control has six operating modes: UV, LV, UD, LD, AM, and CW. The 280,000 frequencies and six operating modes are selected by the radio set control. The control also contains a seven-step volume and three-step squelch control as well as a self-test switch and system fault indicator lights. Tuning and operation information is transmitted to the R/T through serial ASCII control words at RS-422 signal levels and a 9600-baud rate.

22.14.2.1.3 Antenna. Each HF system uses one long-wire antenna. The antennas are attached between the vertical fin and the fuselage. A lightning arrestor is

ORIGINAL 22-48

placed between the antenna and the antenna coupler. Maintenance on the HF antennas should be performed using instructions contained in NAVAIR 0 l -75PAA-27.

22.14.2.1.4 Antenna Coupler CW2275(V)2/ARC- 190(V). There are two antenna couplers: HF 2 is located at bay 15 and HF 1 is located at bay 42. The antenna coupler consists of two basic case structures: a sealed control compartment, and a pressurized tuner assembly. The tuner assembly is pressurized at 8 to 9 pounds per square inch using dry nitrogen. This prevents possible arcing at high altitude, provides a cooling medium, and prevents corrosive elements from entering the unit. Microprocessor devices digitally tune the coupler to provide impedance matching between the R/T and long-wire antenna. This allows maximum power transfer from the R/T to the antenna. The coupler uses no mechanical components (motors, variable coils, or variable capacitors). This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance. The digital impedance matching network is made up of fixed coils and capacitors selected by high-voltage vacuum relays, This allows frequencies to be selected at a very high speed.

22.14.2.2 Power Requirements. Both HF systems are supplied 115 Vat, 400 Hz, three-phase power: HF 1 from the monitorable essential AC bus, monitorable essential dc; and HF 2 from main AC bus A, monitorable essential dc. The KY-75 system is supplied 28-Vdc power from the monitorable essential DC bus, flight station electrical load center. To apply power to HF 1 and HF 2 the following circuit breakers:

1. RT-134l/ARC-190 HF 1 circuit breakers, locatedat forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

2. HF 2 circuit breakers, located at forward left electronics rack and armament circuit breaker panels (communications).

22.14.2.3 Operation. Both HF systems operate identically in plain communication mode. Power is applied to the HF system when the TAKE CMD/OFF switch on the radio set control is set to TAKE CMD. The chassis power supply generates all the voltages required forthe R/T, radio set control, and antenna coupler. The R/T has three main functions: control, reception, and transmission. The control function encompasses both receive and transmit. In the receive mode, the R/T translates incoming RF signals in the range of 2.000 MHz to 29.999 MHz to audio. In the transmit mode, audio modulates an RF carrier signal in the same frequency range.

Control of the R/T is provided by an external radio set control that supplies frequency, mode, preset chan-

NAVAIR 0%‘ISPAA-I.3

nel, volume, and squelch data in serial format. This data is received by control circuitry in the m that provides bidirectional serial communications data with a compat- ible antenna coupler. The R/T stores the preset channel information and controls other module functions within the WT via parallel data lines.

In the EP-3J AN/ARC-190(V) HF installation, SIMOP lockout relays and RC time delay circuits incorporated into the dual I-IF system prevent both tmnsmit- ters from being transmitted at the same time. When HF 1 or HF 2 is keyed, the RC time delay will not permit the radio to transmit for approximately 30 milliseconds. This allows the coax relay of the opposite system time to actuate and connect the coupler to a dummy load.

HF PTT key, MIC audio, and receive audio signals are routed to and from the m through the AUK or master ICS control as selected by the in-flight communicator. The PTT key and MIC audio lines are also routed to the AUX ICS control where the MIC select switch routes the signals to either the HF-MIUMD- 1203 select switch or through the AIC-22 ICS adapter to the master ICS control. For more information on MD- 1203 operation with the HF system, refer to the E 3- 1203 paragraph 22.12 in this chapter.

Two MMT33H transfotmers, Tl and R in each system @IF 1 and HF 2), provide impedance matching between the ISO-ohm audio ports for the RT-134l(V)3/ARC- 190(V) R/T and the 600-ohm AIC-22 ICS system. An F-1629/AGC-9 acoustical filter is installed in the MIC audio line of both HF 1 and HF 2 to attenuate low-level signals (300 to 3500 Hz). The PTT discrete is routed from the in-flight communicator’s red handset, through the SAJB, NSA AID unit, through normally open contacts of relay Kl (at the in-flight communicator’s station). From the in-flight communicator’s station relay Kl, the PIT discrete is routed to the HF 1 R/T.

RX audio (C) is routed from HF 1 R/T, through impedance matching transformer T2 and through normally open contacts of relay Kl (at the in-flight communicator’s station) to the NSA AID unit. The RX audio (C) signal then is routed from the NSA AID unit, through the SAJB to the KY-75 processor. RX audio (P) is returned to the NSA AID unit and then routed through the SAJB to the in-flight communicator’s red handset.

22.14.2.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. TO remove power from either HF system in an emergency situation pull the following circuit breakers:

1. RT-1341/ARC-190 HF 1 $A, $B, and $C circuit breakers, located at forward right electronic’s rack circuit breaker panel.

22-49 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ul-TSI’AA-I.3

2. HF 2 $A, QB, and +C circuit breakers, located at fonvard left electronics rack and armament circuit breaker panels (communications).

22.14.3 MD-1203/lJLT Audio Modulator. T h e MD-1203/LTLT audio modulator No. 1, installed at the in-flight communicator station, supports HF 1 and HF 2 radios. Channel 1 output is connected to HF I radio and channel 2 output is connected to HF 2 radio.

22.14.3.1 Component Description. The MD-1203 audio modulator is a dual enclosure unit that houses identical modulators. The single unit audio modulator is a single-chassis configuration. The chassis contains the power supply, waveform generators, amplifiers, and control circuits necessary to provide the desired functions. The selected audio modulation signal and key line are routed through the AUX ICS control unit. The AUX ICS control unit routes each channel output to the corresponding HF transmitter. A center OFF position of the AUX ICS control HFMD-1203 TX SEL switches inhibit transmission in either mode.

22.14.3.2 Power Requirements. The audio mod- ulatorissupplied 1 lSVac,400-Hzpowerfromthemoni- torable essential AC bus. To apply power to the audio modulator, press the MD-1203 circuit breaker, located at the forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

22.14.3.3 Operation. The audio modulator output signals consist ofboth simple and complex wave shapes, including: tone, bagpipe, noise, and morse code. The control function is the keying circuit for the associated HF or UHF transmitter when the MODE switch is set to the JAM position. The audio modulator front panel contains all operating controls and indicators. All controls and indicators are duplicated for channel 1 and channel 2 except the POWER and VOLUME control.

22.14.3.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. TO remove power from the audio modulator in an emergency situation, pull the MD-1203 circuit breaker, located at the forward left electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

22.14.4 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-162. VHF/ UHF system communication may be monitored on the AUX ICS control section. In-flight communicator may transmit and receive communication on VHF/UHF via the AN/AIC-22 AUX ICS master control unit. For additional information on normal V/UHF operation, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-I. 1 Section VIII, Chapter 10.

22.14.5 UHF System AN/ARC-159. UHF 1 and UHF 2 system communication may be monitored on the AUX ICS control (refer to the AUX ICS section of this chapter). In-flight communicator may transmit and receive communication on UHP 1 and UHF 2 via the AN/AIC-22 master control unit.

22.15 TAClEWO STATION

Aside from crew coordination and tactical planning, the TAC/EWO operates mission peculiar radio systems. As configured on this model aircraft, the TAC/EWO station may transmit and receive voice audio on UHF 3 through UHF 6, ECM 1, and ECM 2 radios using the AUX ICS control unit. TAC/EWO may transmit and receive on UHF 1 secure voice system or SATCOM secure voice system using the secure handset (selected at the TAtYEW station). TAG’EWO can monitor V/UHF, UHF I, UHF 2, and MAIN ICS left and right audio on the AUX ICS control unit (all other functions are not connected). In addition, TAtYEW may transmit and receive on HF 1, HF 2, V/UHF, UHF 1, and UHF 2 radio systems using the master ICS controls.

22.151 AN/ARC-l59 UHF 2 Radio System. The UHF 2 AN/ARC-l59 radio system comprises an RT- 1150 receiver/transceiver, a C-9816 control unit, and an MT-4658 mount. The AN/ARC-l59 communications system is a solid-state UHF R/T that provides two-way amplitude-modulated double-sideband, full carrier radio communication. The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on arty one of 7,000 frequencies, spaced 25-kHz apart in the 225.000 to 399.975 MHz frequency range. The radio is also capable of guard frequency reception. The guard receiver module is a self-contained fix-tuned receiver set to 243.000 MHz and can operate simultaneously with the main receiver.


22.15.1.1.1 RT-llSO/ARC-159(V) Receiver/ Transmitter. The RT-II50 UHF 2 R/T has a frequency range of225.0 to 399.975 MHz, spaced 25 kHz apart. Power output is approximately 10 watts, Any 1 of 20 preset channels or any 1 of 7,000 frequencies may be selected from the C-9816 control unit. The R/T is located at bay 44.

22.15.1.1.2 MT-4659/ARC-159(V) Mount. T h e MT-4658 mount is a nonconnectotized mount that holds the RT-1150 R/T, secured by bullet type pins at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All R/T interface is wired directly to the connectors, located at the rear of the R/T unit. The MT-4658 mount is located at bay 44.

ORIGINAL 22-50

22.15.1.1.3 AT-256AIARC Blade Antenna. UHF 2 uses a blade antenna located on the upper fuselage at FS 684.

22.15.1.1.4 C-9816/ARC-159(V) Control Unit. The C-9816 UHF 2 control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operator to select READ, PRESET, MANUAL, and GUARD frequency operation and selects associated R/T’s for operation. The control unit is located at the TAC/EWO console.

22.15.1.2 Power Requirements. UHF 2 system is supplied 28-vdc power from the monitorable essential DC bus. To apply power to the UHF 2 system, press the following circuit breakers:

1. MONITORABLE ESSENTIAL DC BUS circuit breaker, located at the forward electrical load center.

2. ARC-159 UHF NO. 2 circuit breakers, located at the forward right electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

22.15.1.3 Operation. The UHF 2 system operates in conjunction with the AN/AIC-22 ICS system and associated AUX ICS control. The UHF radio set also operates “standalone”, in the event of an ICS system failure. Operation of the AN/ARC-l59 UHF 2 radio set includes preset operation, manual operation, CLEAR voice transmission, and emergency GUARD operation.

22.15.1.3.1 Plain Voice Operation. To transmit on UHF 2, the master ICS control MIC SEL switch must be set to UHF 2. The microphone keyline is distributed through the FNIB to the UHF MIC control relay (KS). The UHF MIC control relay is actuated, applying a ground to the transceiver, keying the RII: Transmit voice MIC audio signals from the AIC-22 system are distributed, via the F-1629/AGC acoustical filters and the ICS isolation box (Al 50). to the Rff for modulation.

To monitor UHF 2 receive audio, select the UHF 2 receive switch on the master ICS control unit. Receive audio originates at the R/T as unattenuated audio and is distributed to the UHF 1 control unit in the flight station for volume control. The audio line is a 600 ohm impedance line. The receive audio signal is then interfaced with the AIC-22 system.

22.15.1.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. I n the event of an ICS failure, a microphone and handset can be plugged into jacks on the front of the RT- 11 SO/ARC-l 59 R/T for radio communication purposes. To remove power from the UHF 2 system during an emergency situation, pull the ARC-159 UHF NO. 2

NAVAR 0%75PM-1.3

circuit breakem on the forward right electronics circuit breaker panel.

22.15.2 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-182. VHF/ UHF system communication may be monitored on the AUX ICS control TAC/EWO may transmit and receive communication on VHF/UHF via the AN/AIC-22 master control unit. For additional information on normal V/UHFoperation,refer toNAVAIROl-75PAA-I.1 Set- tion VIII, Chapter 10.

22.15.3 ANIUSQ-113 ECM 1 AND ECM 2 Coun- termeasures System. TAC/EWO may transmit and receive communication on ECM 1 and ECM 2 (located at C2W 1 and C2W2), via the AUX ICS unit while the MIC SEL switch is in the AUX position. For control settings on the AUX ICS system, refer to the AUX ICS section in this chapter.

22.16 C2W STATIONS 1 AND 2

C2W station’s 1 and 2 operators’ primary mission is to detect, classify, and report contact data, and record audio information for mission reconstruction. They shall ensure a chronological log is kept for reconstruction, debrief and postex message use. The C2W operator’s will also operate mission-peculiar radio system9 UHF-3 through UHF-6, EA 1, EA 2, and the MD-1203 modulator. As contigured on this model aircraft, the C2W 1 operator may transmit and receive voice audio or MD-1203 modulated audio on UHF 3, UHF 4, EA 1, and EA 2 (MD-1203 modulated input to EA 1 and EA 2 is selectedon theUSQ-113), viathe AUX ICScontrol unit. C2Wl can monitor UHF 5, UHF 6, MD-1203 modulated audio input, and main ICS left and right audio on the AUX ICS control unit (all other functions are not connected). In addition, C2Wl and 2 may transmit and receive on HF 1, I-IF 2, and V/UHF radio systems using the master ICS controls.

22.16.1 UHF Controls. Available functions at C2W 1 and 2 for mission UHF radios are UHF 3 through UHF 6, receive audio selection to left ear (RX LEFT) or right ear (RX RIGHT) and for UHF 3 through UHF 6 MIC TX switches used for voice transmission. UHF 3 and UHF 4 MD-1203 TX switches used for modulated audio transmission (C2Wl), UHF-5 and 6, MD-1203 TX switches for C2W2. C2Wl can also transmit key data on UHF 3 and UHF 4, (C2W2 on UHF 5 and UHF 6) while the AUX mode is deselected.

22.16.1.1 EA No. 1 and No. 2 Controls. C2Wl may transmit or receive on either EA system. To transmit MD-1203 key data, refer to EA 1 controls in this chapter.

22-51 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

22.18.2 VHF/UHF System AN/ARC-182. C2W operators may transmit and receive communication on V/UHF’ via the AN/AIC-22 master control unit. For additional information on normal V/UHF operation, re- fertoNAVAIROl-75PAA-1.1 SectionVIII, Chapter 10.

Note UHF 3 and UHF 4 may be modulated by MD-1203 or voice by C2Wl. UHF 5 and UHF 6 may be modulated by MD-1203 or voice by C2W2 with main ICS selected on MIC SEL switch (AUX ICS controlbox) and C2WKqW2. Operators may be unaware of outgoing transmissions.

22.18.3 ANIARC-159 UHF 3 through UHF 8 Ra- dio System. The UHF 3 through UHF 6 AN/ARC- 159 radio systems each comprise an RT-1150 R/T, a C-9816 control unit, and an MT-4658 mount. The communications system is a solid state UHF R/T that provides two-way, amplitude-modulated, double-sideband, full carrier radio communication. The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on any one of 7,000 frequencies spaced 25 kHz apart in the 225.000 to 399.975 MHz frequency range. The radio is also capable of guard tiequency reception. The guard receiver module is a self-contained fix-tuned receiver set to 243.000 MHz and can operate simultaneously with the main receiver. Any one of 20 preset frequencies or any one of the 7,000 frequencies within the range of the radio may be selected.


22.18.3.1.1 RT-llSO/ARC-159(V) Receiver/ Transmitter. The RT-1150 UHF 1 R/T has a frequency range of 225.000 to 399.975 MHz, spaced 25 kHz apart. Power output is approximately 10 watts. Any one of 20 preset channels or any one of 7,000 frequencies may be selected from the C-9816 control unit. The RT-1150 RjT is located at bay 17.

22.18.3.1.2 MT-4858/ARC-1596) Mount. The MT-4658 mount is a nonconnectorized mount that holds the RT-1150 R/T, secured by bullet type pins at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All WT interface is wired directly to the connectors, located at the rear of the R/T mount. The MT-4658 mount is located at bay 17.

22.18.3.1.3 AT-258AIARC Blade Antenna. UHF 3 and UHF 4 use blade antennas located on the tiselage at FS 388 upper and FS 1010 lower, respectively.

22.18.3.1.4 C-9818/ARC-159(V) Control Unit. The UHF control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operator to select READ, PRESET, MAN- UAL, and GUARD frequency operation and selects associated R/T’s for communication or navigation operation. The UHF 3 and w 4 control unit is located at the C2W 1 console.

22.18.3.2 Power Requirements. UHF 3 through 6 systems are supplied 28-Vdc power from the main load center DC limiter bus. To apply power to both UHF systems, press the following circuit breakers:

1. UHF NO. 3 circuit breaker, mission circuit breaker panel.



4. UHF NO. 6 circuit breaker, mission circuitbreaker panel.

22.18.3.3 Operation. The UHF 3 through UHF 6 systems operate in conjunction with the AN/AK-22 ICS system and associated AUX ICS control. Tbe UHF radio set also operates “standalone”, in the event of an ICS system failure. Operation of the AN/ARC-l59 UHF radio set includes preset operation, manual operation, CLEAR voice transmission, and emergency GUARD operation.

22.18.3.3.1 Plain Voice Operation. To monitor UHF 1 or UHF 2 receive audio, select the desired UHF radio receive switch on the ICS master control unit. Receive audio originates at the transceiver as unattenuated audio and is distributed to the UHF control unit at the C2Wl console for volume control. The audio line is a 600 ohm impedance line. The receive audio signal is then distributed to the AK-22 system.

To operate the UHF 3 through UHF 6 system using the AUX ICS control, refer to the AUX ICS section of this chapter.

22.18.3.32 MD-1203 Modulator Operation. Audio from the MD-1203 modulator is routed through the audio distribution panel, through a matching transformer, to the associated AUX ICS control unit, and to the R/T for modulation.

ORIGINAL 22-52

22.16.3.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. In the event of an KS failure, a microphone and handset can be plugged into jacks on the front of the RT-llSO/ARC-159 R/T for radio communication purposes. To remove power from UHF systems during an emergency situation, pull the UHF NO. 3 , 4, 5, or 6 circuit breaker on the mission circuit breaker panel.

22.16.4 AN/USQ-113(V) Radio Countermea- sures System. The ANRTSQ-113(V) radio countermeasures system provides both fixed-frequency and frequency-agile radio communications capability as well as radio frequency band ESM, and EA capability. In the EA and ESM modes, the system provides communications monitoring capability or jamming capability against single-channel fixed-frequency or slow frequency-hopping communications in the HF, VHF, and UHF frequency ranges. When not being used in the EAiESM mode, the system may be operated as a standard radio for conventional communications or as an antijam radio for ECCM communications. The two radio communication modes are referred to as COMM-1 and COMM-2, respectively. Two ANNSQ-I 13 systems are installed on the EP-3J. System No. 1 is controlled and operated from CZW Station 1 (CZWI). System No. 2 is controlled and operated from C2W Station 2 (C2W2).


22.16.4.1.1 USQ-113 Operator Control. The USQ-113 operator control is a microprocessor contml- led system interface that processes commands entered from the controllers keypad. System status information is shown on the front panel display and hard copy information is provided from the front panel printer.

22.16.4.1.2 C-12159 System Controller. The C- 12159 system controller interfaces to the operator control and executes commands via a microprocessor internal to the unit. The system controller executes commands for the following modes of operation: EA/ESM scanning, COMM-2 Anti-Jam, COMM-1 Communica- tions, and Self-Test functions.

22.16.4.1.3 RT-1647 Receiver/-Transmitter. The RT-1647 R/T provides frequency coverage from 20 MHz to 500 MHz. The R/T is a scanning transceiver that permits rapid scanning of multiple 25 kHz frequency channels, and reports detected signals to the operator control. The R/T for systems No. 1 and 2 located at bay 18.

22.16.4.1.4 AM-7434 High-Power AmplifTer. The HPA accepts FM and AM signal frequencies from the Rff and amplities to a power level of 400 watts (FM)

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

and 100 watts (AM). The HPA contains a directional coupler that detects forward and reflected power. Signal direction status is returned to the operator control unit. The HPA for systems No. 1 and 2 located at bay 18.

22.16.4.1.5 AS-4242, AS-4243, and AS-4244 Antennas. The ANNSQ-113 system requires three antennas. The AS-4242 receive antenna is a EdI band antenna and is located on the upper fuselage at FS 587.5. The transmit antennas are divided between low-band operation and high-band operation. The AS-4243 is a low-band antenna that operates between 20 MHz and 100 MHzandislocatcdonthelower fUselageat FS 723, LBL 34. The AS4244 is a high-band antenna that operates between 100 MHz and 500 MHz and is located on the lower fuselage at FS 723, RBL 34.

22.16.4.2 Power Requirements. The ANNSQ- 113 system is supplied 115 Vat, 400 Hz, three-phase power from MAIN AC BUS A, via the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

The USQ-113 No. 1 operator control is powered by 115 Vat, phase A. The USQ-113 No. 2 operator control is powered by 115 Vat, phase B.

22.16.4.3 Operation. Operation between the units of either USQ-113 system and the related aircraft systems with which it interfaces is dependent upon the transmitter modulation source selected.

22.16.4.3.1 USQ-113 Intercommunications System Control. The ICS path routes audio from the AUX KS control at C2W1, C2W2, and TAC/EWO stationtotbeUSQ-113s. Eachpathcaoies three signals: MIC audio, PTT transmit control, and receive audio.

Selection of ICS as the modulation source for the USQ-113s is accomplished by setting the AUX ICS MIC SEL switch to AUX position, and the EA 1 or 2 TX MIC switch to MIC position. The ICS MIC audio is routed from the C2W1, C2W2, and TAC/EWO AUX ICS control to the F-1629/AGC acoustical filter. The acoustical filter attenuates low-level signals in the 300- to 3500-Hz range. The MIC audio is routed thorn the acoustical filter to the USQ-113 operator controls. The PIT line is routed from C2W1, C2W2, and TAC/EWO AUX ICS control to USQ-113 operator control.

22.16.4.3.2 USQ-113 ICS Receive Audio. Receive audio is routed from USQ- 113 No. 1 operator control to the AUX ICS controls at the CZWl, C2W2, and TAC/EWO stations. Receive audio can be monitoredby setting the AUX ICS control MIC SEL switch to AUX, the EA UESM switch to EA , and the EA/FX toggle switch to the R or L position. USQ-113 receive audio

22-53 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

is routed i?oom AUX ICS control to the headset right ear speaker or headset left ear speaker as selected.

22.16.4.3.3 MD-1203 Modulator Operation. Mod- ulated audio is routed from the MD-1203 modulator to the USQ-113 operator control external modulation input. The MD-1203 No. 2 is located between C2W1 and C2W2. Channel 1 modulated audio is routed through the audio distribution panel to USQ- 113 No. 1 operatorcon- trol. The MD-1203 No. 2 channel 2 modulated audio is routed through the audio distribution panel to USQ-113 No. 2 operator control.

22.17 RADAR OPERATOR

The radar operator’s primary mission is to support the mission by utilizing radar, and IRDS systems as directed by the TAC/EWO to detect and analyze targets of operational significance, and to provide radar intercept and navigation information to the TACYEWO-NAV. The radar operator will also operate the B* pulse generator control (interfaced with the AN/APS-80), and report RMS radar plot information to be recorded on the VHS VCR at C2W2.

22.17.1 Bs Radar Simulator System. TheB*Ra- dar Simulator System (B’) is a pulse generator with unique PRF characteristics. Output impedance, pulse amplitude, pulse width, rise time, and load-driving capability are comparable with requirements of the AN/APS-80 radar system. The B* provides outputs to trigger the RMS indicator and both radar modulators to alter the normal radiating characteristics of the AN/APS-80 radar system.

22.17.1.1 Component Description. The equipment as installed in the EP-3J interfaces with the AN/APS-80 radar system and consists of the B2 control located at the radar operators station, and the B* unit located in bay 11, The B* system control selects either the normal AN/APS-80 PRF of 390 to 420 PPS or an altered PRF. This is accomplished by routing the two required outputs from the SN-234/APS-80 synchronizer through a relay in the B2 unit. Therefore no cable reconfiguration is required during flight. Cable provisions for the B* control box are located at the radar operators console and for the B* unit in bay 11.

22.17.1.1.1 BZ Control Box. The B2 control box consists of a six-position pushbutton switch assembly with illuminated caps. The switches are mechanically interlocked so that the one pushed last remains pressed and all others are released. The caps are independently lit to indicate status.

22.17.1.1.2 Bz Simulator. Modifications have been incorporated to the B2 unit to accept an external PRF trigger from an SG-I 189/AST-4 control. This permits the PRF of the APS-80 to be varied in flight. A BNC-type connector and a toggle switch have been added to the top of the B’ unit. When operated in the B* mode, the INT position of the switch selects the usual B* output signal. The EXT position selects the variable PRF provided by the SG-1189/AST-4 control via the BNC connector.

Providing a variable PRF for the AN/APS-80 radar poses a significant risk of damage to the radar equipment. Ensure that only qualified personnel operate this equipment.

Do not exceed PRF limitations as listed on APS-80 Guide in the Mission Command- ers notebook to prevent possible damage to equipment.

Do not alter PRF on AST-4 control box during RF transmission as damage to equipment may occur.

22.17.1.2 Power Requirements. 28 Vdc is supplied to the B2 system from the main DC bus. To apply power to the B’radar simulator system, press the 28 Vdc B-SQUARED circuit breaker, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

22.17.1.3 Operation. WiththeB’controlinNORM (radar mode), signals are routed, uninterrupted, through the normally closed contacts of relays inside the unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse is routed from SN- 234/APS-80 radar synchronizer to the B* unit. The MOD TRIGGER pulse then is routed from B2 unit to both the forward and aft radar modulators (in parallel). SYNC signals are routed from SN-234/APS-80 radar synchronizer to the B2 unit. The SYNC signals then are routed from B* unit to the C-12272 RMS indicator.

With the B* control in simulation mode, SYNC signals and the MOD TRIGGER pulse are output directly to the forward and aft radar modulators, and to the RMS indicator.

22.17.1.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. To remove power from the B2 radar simulator system, pull the 28 Vdc B-SQUARED circuit breaker, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

ORIGINAL 22-54

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

22.17.2 Video Home System. The VHS VCR is commercial equipment that provides training mission case storage for radar images obtained by tbe radar operator. The VHS recorder itself is located at C2W2 because of the lack of available space at the RADAR OPERATOR console. The VCR is operated predominantly in record mode. Control and operation of the VCR unit should be performed with the remote control, also located at the C2W2 console.

22.18 NAVlEWO STATION/STATION 8A

The NAV/EWO’s primary mission is to operate the SATCOM communication system and monitor navigation instruments. As configured for this model aircraft, the AN/ARC-l87 SATCOM transmits and receives voice audio with secure voice capabilities. The NAViEWO can monitor V/UHF, UHF 1, and UHF 2 from the AUX KS unit (all other functions are not connected). The NAViEWO may also monitor main ICS left and right audio. In addition, the NAV/EWO may transmit and receive on HF 1, HF 2, V/UHF, UHF 1, and UHF 2 radio systems using the master KS controls.

22.18.1 AN1167 SATCOM System (With Secure Voice)

22.18.2 Station 8A. The STA 8A operator’s primary mission is to operate the ALQ-170 system and the wing store control units. STA 8A has been established adjacentto theNAV/EWO’sstationbetweenFS 512and FS 533. There are two AN/ALQ-170 control units and two video monitors locatedat STA 8A. In addition,there are six wing stores control unit accommodations above the AN/ALQ-170 systems. The wiring harnesses for each wing stores control unit is stored behind the blank- off plate for the same. It is the responsibility of the pod operator to correctly tune and utilize the proper ECM/ESM pods as directed by the TAC/EWO or mission commander. While on station, all pod times, operating data, changes during operations and malfunctions shall be recorded on a log sheet in chronological format to aid in data reconstruction, debriefand postex message

pertomranceofenemythreats.ThemarehvoAN/ALQ-170 controller-indicators at STA SA, that support WS pylons at WS12 and WS15. A PDI and a PDI select panel are located a the pilot and copilot stations.

22.18.3.1 Component Description. The CMSS is a three-channel, monopulse radar system capable of utilizing different simulations in a given frequency band. Each simulation is contained in a SEM memory card and has the potential for five operator selectable options. In addition to the simulations, the operator can select the navigational mode which is a standard PPI radar display.

Note Observe all applicable cautions, warnings, and handling procedures for external wing stores as prescribed in NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-75.

22.18.3.1.1 C-11508/ALQ-170(V) Controller- indicator. The C-11508 controller-indicator provides control for a specific WS pylon system (WS12 or WS 15). The controller-indicator permits the operator to set the mode of operation for the AN/ALQ- 170 pod and monitor system status information. There are two controller-indicators located at STA 8A console, immediately below the dual video monitors.

22.16.3.1.2 WV-5372A Dual Video Monitors. WV-5372A dual video monitors, used to display AN/ALQ-170 radar video and system information, are mounted in a 19-inch rack directly above the controller- indicators. There are two g-inch display monitors that connect to each AN/ALQ-170 system and the associated WS pylon system (W’S12 or WS15). Both monitors are high-resolution black and white video monitors.

22.18.3.f.3 ANIALQ-170 Pod. The ANIALQ-170 CMSS pod is not addressed in the scope of this manual. for more information on system operation, tests, and equipment support, refer to the NAVAIR 16- 3OALQ170-1.

use.

22.163 Wing Stores Control System and AN/ ALQ-170(V) System. TheCMSSAN/ALQ47O(V)l, is a tracking radar transmitter and receiver that comprise the CMSS pod, a C-l 1508/ALQ-170 controller- indicator, a video monitor, a PDI and the PDI select P: mel. The CMSS provides the capability to search, acquire, and track a target in a manner simulating the

22.18.3.1.4 UPW Wiring. The AN/ALQ-170(V) system interconnect wiring provides interconnection between: AN/ALQ-170 countermeasures simulator pods at WS12 or WS15, video indicator and control indicator (console), auxiliary equipment, PDI and PDI select panels (pilot and copilot), ICS interface, and power circuits. Umbilical cables are permanently installed in the WS12 and WS15 pylons.

22-55 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Failure to attach the umbilical cable connector lanyardprior to flight could result in damage to the pod, umbilical cable, and pylon.

22.18.3.2 Power Distribution. Primary power is supplied from the main load center dc limiter bus and ac bus A through the wing stores power relay to the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45. The dual video monitors arc supplied 115 Vat, 60 Hz power by the 60 Hz circuit breaker panel at bay 17.

piGi-

To prevent injury to personnel or damage to equipment, ensure all external stores are safe and use extreme care when applying power to the AN/ALQ-170 equipment.

Note

Unless the armament safety circuit is disabled, ac and dc power provided to the AN/ALQ-170 circuit breakers will be dcenergized when the landing gear handle is placed. in the down position (refer to NAVAIR 01-75PAA-2-26).

To apply power to the AN/ALQ-170 system and associated pylons, press the following circuit breakers:

1. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker located at the armament circuit breaker panel forward let? electronics rack.

2. WING STORES PWR RLY circuit breaker, located at the armament circuit breaker panel, forward left electronics rack.

3. PDI SELECT circuit breaker, located a the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

4. POSN 12 and POSN 15 circuit breakers, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

5. CBI circuit breaker, located at the 60 Hz circuit breaker panel at bay 17 (dual video monitors).

22.18.3.3 System Operation. During transmission of a typical simulation, four modes of operation are

available. These are SEARCH, ACQUISITION, TRACK, and REACQUISTION. In SEARCH, the antenna scans in an attempt to tind a target. A joystick- operated cursor is available to aid the operator in searching. The ACQUISITION mode is engaged when a potential target is located. If the target is not valid, the CMSS returns to the SEARCH mode. If the target is valid, the CMSS locks into the TRACK mode. In TRACK mode, the CMSS follows the target range and angle movements. If the CMSS loses the target while in the TRACK mode, a condition known as BREAK LOCK occurs. The CMSS moves into the REACQUIS- TION mode and uses several methods to locate the lost target. If reacquisition is not successful, the CMSS returns to SEARCH mode.

Operating procedures for the AN/ALQ-170 system are contained in the technical manual, operators instructions, countermeasures simulator set, AN/ALQ-170(V) publication. Direct request for this publication to Com- mandine. Offtcer. Naval Air Warfare Center. Airaft Division, Indianapolis, 6000 E. 21st St, Indianapolis, IN46219-2189.

22.18.3.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. TO remove power in an emergency, pull the following circuit breakers:

1. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker located at the armament circuit breaker panel forward left electronics rack.


3. PDI SELECT circuit breaker, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

4. POSN 12 and POSN 15 circuit breakers, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

5. CBI circuit breaker, located at the 60 Hz circuit breaker panel at bay 17 (dual video monitors).

22.18.3.5 RD481/A Recorder-Reproducer. See NAVAIR 0 l -75PAA-11 for detailed information and operating procedures.

22.18.3.8 ANIASN-124 System. See NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 for detailed information and operating procedures.

22.18.3.7 ANIARN-99(V) OMEGA Navigation Set. See NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-11 for detailed infonna- tion and operating procedures.

ORIGINAL 22-58

22.16.3.6 LTN-72 Inertial Navigation System

22.16.3.6.1 Power Distribution. The LTN-72 INS utilizes 115-volt, 400 Hz, single-phase ac power pm- vided by the main ac bus A for normal run/heaterpower. This power is provided through two circuit breaken labeled ARINC 561 located on the forward left electronic circuit breaker panel. Twenty-six Vat power is provided for synchro excitation through the TASiINS circuit breaker located on the forward navigation interconnection box.

22.16.3.6.2 Inertial Navigation Unit. The INU houses the gyro stabilized inertial platform, the C-4000 digitial computer, inertial power supply, and a digital subsystem. The platform is an all attitude 2’ of t?eedom gyro stabilized platform uses accelerometers as its sens- ing element. The basic outputs of the INU platform include pitch and roll, velocity and platform azimuth. The INU power supply converts 11 S-volt, 400 Hz, single-phase, primary power into the various regulated and unregulated dc voltages required by the system, and is capable of operating from a dc supply in the event 1 IS- volt power is lost. In the event of an interrupt in the 400-Hz power, the system automatically switches to a backup dc source. The system turn-on sequence is interlocked such that both ac and dc sources must be present. This prevents the inadvertent discharge of the battery and operation of the system without a back dc source. The C-4000 computer is a general purpose digital computer. It provides all the navigational, guidance, and alignment computations required at the INU as well as the integrity monitoring routines. The digital subsystem converts the various navigation data from the computer to analog, binary or binary-coded decimal format for use by other aircraft systems and the control display unit. The digital subsystem also accepts a true airspeed signal from the aircraft’s true airspeed computer that is used to compute windspeed and direction.

22.16.3.6.3 Battery Unit. The BU located in electronic bay 15 supplies nominal 24-Vdc backup and tum- on power to the INS. The BU is charged during normal operation by the INU to 26.5 Vdc. In the event that primary 115Vat power is lost, the BU will provide operating power to the INS for 30 minutes or until the battery discharges below a predetermined level of 17.5 Vdc; then the INS will automatically shutdown. Exces- sive current drain protection is provided by a 25amp circuit breaker located on the front of the BU. A battery input to the INU must be present before the LTN-72 will turn on. Once it is on and and an alignment has been completed, a failure of the primary 400-Hz input power will cause the system to revert to the backup battery source and the BAIT annunciator on the CDU to light. If the backup dc source falls below a usable level, the

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

BAIT annunciator on the MSU and the INS WARN annunciator on the CDU will illuminate.

22.16.3.6.4 Remote Compass Transmitter. The remote compass transmitter (ML 1) is an improved form of wet compass utilizing a flux valve. The compass transmitter contains a gimbal-mounted flux valve sealed in a viscous fluid-tilled hemispherical bowl. Located in the starboard horizontal stabilizer, it is aligned with the aircraft longitudinal axis and it compares aircraft heading relative to local magnetic north. Excitation voltage is provided to the transmitter from the compass adapter compensator.

22.16.3.6.5 Compass Adapter Compensator. Through a complex arrangement of synchros, control transformers and servo motors, the adaptercompensator combines the magnetic heading signal from the ML-l flux valve with the platform heading signals from the INU through the SDC. This provides the HSI compass card with the quick response of a gyro signal input and the long-term accuracy of a magnetic signal input. The information from the platform heading and the flux valve is combined and processed according to the mode selected by the switch on the copilot compass system controller. Power to the compass adapter-compensator is obtained from main ac bus A by the P-3B MOD COMPADPTR circuit breakers.

22.16.3.6.6 Rate Switching Gyro. The rate switching gyroscope is a single degree-of-freedom gyroscope oriented to provide sensitivity about the yaw axis of the aircraft. During turns at rates of ISo per minute or greater, a signal is sent to the compass-adapter compensator that temporarily interrupts the slaving (synchroniz- ing) function. This allows the fast-changing azimuth signal from the gyroscope assembly to be unhindered by the relatively slow-changing flux valve signal during a fast tum. Power to the rate switching gyro is provided from main ac bus A and from main dc through the P-3B COMPADPTR circuit breakers.

22.16.3.6.7 Compass System Controller. The compass system controller, located on the copilot side console, controls the magnetic heading output of the MX-6886/ASN-50 compass compensator adapter that receives an inertial platform heading signal via the CV- 3502/ASN-124 signal data converter and flux valve output from the remote compass transmitter, ML-l. Controller selections are displayed when the INERTIAL position is selected on the HSI control-indicator in the RADIO position. It also controls synchronization ofaxi- muth and applies Earth-rate compensation to the system. It has no effect on inertial pitch and roll signals available to the copilot MM-4.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

INDICATOR/CONTROL FUNCTION

PUSH TO SYNC Switch Causes fast synchronization (slaving) of the heading signal from the remote compass transmitter and platform heading signal from the CV-3502/ASN- 124 SDC. Operates in SLAVE mode only.

SYNC Indicator Meter Indicates degree of synchronization between ML-1 heading signal and signal data converter platform heading. Signal in SLAVE and COMPASS modes.

HEMISPHERE INDICATOR Switch

Controls the phase of the Earth-rate correctional signals corresponding to either the Northern or Southern Hemisphere. Functional in SLAVE and FREE modes.

PUSH TO TURN L R Control Slews the compass repeater around to the desired aircraft heading. The direction of knob rotation determines the direction of heading change and the amount of knob rotation determines the speed of heading change operates in SLAVE and FREE modes.

MODE Switch

COMP An emergency mode to be used when the SDC platform heading signal is not available. Because of the oscillatory nature of the raw ML-I heading signal, the autopilot preselect heading feature should not be used in this mode. HSI compass cards are not as steady as in the stabilized SLAVE mode.

SLAVE The normal operating mode that provides a stabilized magnetic heading signal to the HSls with INERTIAL position selected on the respective navigation control panel.

FREE Heading referenced to a grid meridian rather than true north. The heading can be slewed to any desired angle with respect ot the meridian. This mode is used when employing grtd navigation techniques or in regions where the Earth magnetic field is too unreliable.

LATITUDE DEGREES Permits changing the latitude setting to correspond with the position of the aircraft during SLAVE or FREE mode operations. The selected latitude is displayed in the window of the digital indicator and should be updated every 1’ as the aircraft changes latitude.

Figure 22-35. Compass System Controllers Functions

22.18.3.8.8 LTN-7UASN-124 Interconnection. waypoints. Platform azimuth in the form of synchro The LTN-72 transmits data to the ASN-124 signal data signals is also received by the ASN-124 signal data converter in the form of serial binary data. This data will converter for use in the compass adapter compensator consist of true heading, INS velocity, INS position, and instabilizing magnetic heading.

ORIGINAL 22-58

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

MODE SELECT

AFT NAV

J BOX

I

%+- ROLL

TRACK E;zWJ;;SPEED

DRIFT ANGLE CROSS TRACK DEV ;pR&;ANGLE

PRESENT POSITION WAYPOINTS (9) DISTANCE TO GO TIME TO GO WIND SPEED WIND DIRECTION DESIRED TRACK STATUS TEST ALERT SIG BAlT OFFR SIG WARN SIG

r-l

HACLS DPC

4 ZF A/C HEADING PLATFORM HDG

TRUE HDG INS VELOCITIES INS POSITION WAYPOINTS ATTITUDE FLAG DIGITAL DATA WARN

‘Installed on aircraft incorporating AFC 404 “Installed on aircraft incorporating AFC 399

AN/AGC-S(V)1 cl TELETYPE- ws!J;5R

Figure 22-36. LTN-72/ASN-124 Interconnections


NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 23

Flight Station Systems

23.1 INTRODUCTION

In addition to their primary mission, the pilot and copilot will operate flight essential systems and the following communication systems: VHF/UHF and UHF 1. The pilot and copilot may also select AN/ALQ-170 display information to be shown on indicators located at tbeir respective glareshields. As configured on this model aircraft, the flight station may transmit and receive on VHF/UHF, UHF 1, UHF 2, HFl and HF2 radios using tbe master ICS controls. The pilot may transmit and receive on UHF 1 secure voice system or SATCOM secure voice system using the secure handset, when selected at the TAC/EWO station. For additional information on flight station mission requirements, refer to NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1 and NAVAIR Ol-75PAC- 1.1.

23.2 AN/ARC-l59 UHF 1 RADIO SYSTEM

AN/ARC-159 UHF 1 with secure capability. The UHF 1 AN/ARC-l59 radio system comprises an RT- 1150 receiver/transmitter, an MT-4658 mount, a C- 9816 control unit, and a PP-7095 power supply. The radio system is a solid-state UHF R/T that provides two-way amplitude-modulated double-sideband, full- carrier radio communication. The radio set permits transmitting and receiving on any of 7,000 frequencies, spaced 25 kHz apart in the 225.000 to 399.975 MHz fkquency range. The radio is capable of guard frequency reception and ADF reception. The guard receiver module is a self-contained fix-tuned receiver set to 243.000 MHz and can operate simultaneously with the main receiver. During ADF reception, the radio receives RF signals from the DF antenna and routes the demodulated low frequencies to the DF amplifier. Any one of 20 preset frequencies or any one of the 7,000 frequencies within the range of the radio may be selected. The red handset mounted at the flight station provides the audio interface for UHF 1 secure operations. The pilot controls flightcrew access to the UHF 1 KY-58 secure communications system.


23.2.1.1 RT-1150/ARC-159(V) Receiver- Transmitter. The RT-1150 UHF 1 WT has a frequency range of 225.000 to 399.975 MHz, spaced 25 kHz apart. Power output is approximately 10 watts. Any 1 of 20 preset channels or any 1 of 7,000 frequencies may be selected from the C-9816 control unit. The R/T is located at bay 44. For ADF operation (UHF 1 only), the R/T supplies 28 Vdc to the PP-7095, also located at bay 44. The PP-7095 power supply supplies +225 Vdc to the ANIARA-25 ADF antenna.

23.2.1.2 MT-4656/ARC-159(V) Mount. The MT- 4658 mount is a nonconnectorized mount that holds the R/T, secured by bullet type pins at the rear and knurled knobs at the front of the mount. All RiT interface is wired directly to the connectors, located at the rear of the RJI unit.

23.2.1.3 AT-256AIARC Blade Antenna. UHF 1 uses two blade antennas, one located on the upper fuselage at station FS 299 and the other located on the lower fuselage at station FS 1101. Both antennas are connected to an antenna relay (RE-219/ARR-40) that is controlled by the antenna control unit. The antenna relay switches UHF 1 and UHF 5 between theupperandlower antennas and couples the AN/ARA-25 ADF antenna system to UHF 1.

23.2.1.4 Antenna Control Unit. The antenna selector (LAC9216118-1) is located in the center pedestal of the cockpit and switches UHF 1 and UHF 5 between the upper and lower antennas. With UHF 1 ADF selected, UHF 5 is automatically switched to the upper antenna, regardless of switch position.

23.2.1.5 C-9616/ARC-159(V) Control Unit. The UHF 1 control unit is a multifunction controller that permits the operator to select READ, PRESET, MAN- UAL, and GUARD frequency operation and selects associated R/T’s for communication or navigation operation.The control unit is located in the center pedestal of the cockpit.

23-l ORIGINAL

NAVAIR gl-75PAA-1.3

23.2.1.6 UHF 1 KY-56 ZAHP Remote Control Unit. The KY-58 Z-AHP is a multifunction controller that permits the pilot to select between plain voice and cipher voice communication with the UHF 1 radio set. The remote control unit is located at the pilot’s side console.

23.2.1.7 UHF 1 KY-56 Security Unit. The KY-58 security unit permits the operator to select modes of operation for the KY-58 system and provides a till port for loading key data. Mounting provisions for the security unit are located at bay 43.

23.2.2 Power Requirements. UHF 1 system is supplied 28-Vdc power from the monitorable essential dc bus. To apply power to the UHF 1 system, press the following circuit breakers:

1. UHF 1 DC circuit breakers, located at the fonvard electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

2. UHF ANT RELAY DC circuit breaker, located at the forward electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

23.2.3 Operation. The UHF 1 system operates in conjunction with the AN/AIC-22 ICS system, KY-58 secure voice system, and secure handset. The UHF radio set also operates “standalone”, in the event ofan ICS system failure. Operation of the AN/ARC-I59 UHF 1 radio set includes preset operation, manual operation, CLEAR voice transmission, SECURE voice transmission, and emergency GUARD operation.

23.2.3.1 Plain-Voice Operation. To transmit on UHF 1, the ICS master control MIC SEL switch must be set to UHF 1. The microphone keyline is distributed through the FNIB to the UHF MIC control relay (K7). The UHF MIC control relay is actuated, applying a ground to the Rff via the secure/plain voice relay (Kl), keying the transmitter. Transmit voice MIC audio signals from the AIC-22 system am distributed through the F-1629/AGC acoustical filters, the ICS isolation box (A150), and secure/plain voice relay (K2) to the R/T for modulation.

Note During UHF plain-voice operation with the Z-AHP secure RCU removed, ensure P2 of Z-AHP is connected to jumper plug receptacle in pilot side console for 28 Vdc to remain applied to Kl and K2 relays for plain-voice operation. When secure comm cb out on cb panel, UHF-l radio inhibited.

To monitor UHF 1 receive audio, select the UHF 1 RECEIVE switch on the master ICS control unit. Receive

audio originates at the R/T as unattenuated audio and is distributed to the UHF 1 control unit in the flight station for volume control. The audio line is a 600 ohm impedance line. The receive audio signal is then distributed through the secure/plain voice relay (K2) and interfaces with the AIC-22 system.

23.2.3.2 Secure Voice Operation. To enable secure voice operation, the TACiEWO must select the PILOT SECURE HANDSET switch for UHF 1 on the AUX ICS unit at the TAC/EWO console. 28 Vdc then energizes K2 of the SASU, connecting pilot handset MIC audio and earphone lines to the KY-58 security unit. When the pilot’s handset is keyed, a ground is applied to K6 of the SASU, which opens the plain voice MIC control circuit by energizing secure/plain voice relay (K2) at the pilot console. Secure voice audio is distributed from the red handset only, through the SASU, to theKY-58 securityunit. When the TAC/EWO handset PTT switch is actuated, the TAC/EWO (SASU K6) secure relay is energized, allowing TAC/EWO priority on secure communication, overriding the pilot’s transmission.

23.2.3.3 Antenna Selection. Selection of the upper or lower blade antenna is performed on the antenna select unit located in the flight station center pedestal console. Selecting ANT TOP switch energizes the RE- 219/ARR-40 relay, connecting the upper AT-256 antenna to the UHF 1 RF line. UHF 5 is automatically switched to the antenna not being used by UHF 1.

23.2.4 Emergency Turnoff Procedures. In the event of an ICS failure, a microphone and handset can be plugged into jacks on the t?ont of the RT-115O/ARC-159 for radio communication purposes. To remove power from the UHF 1 system during an emergency, pull the UHF 1 DC circuit breakers on the forward electronics rack circuit breaker panel.

23.3 AN/ALQ-170 POSITION DISPLAY INDICATOR

Both pilot and copilot stations have a PDI and PDI select panel that allow the operator to view AN/ALQ-170 antenna position. In addition, the flight station has the capability to shut down all wing station pods via the search stores power switch located on the lower left center pedestal.

An AUX ICS control unit interfaces the C2W mission-specific equipment with the AIC-22 system and is installed at the following expanded positions: in-flight communicator station, TAC/EWO, NAV, CZWl, and C2W2. In addition, by selecting NAV GROUP on the master ICS controls for pilot, copilot,

ORIGINAL 23-2

NAVAIR Of-75PAA-1.3

in-flight communicator, NAV, and TAUBWO permit voice annotation to the AN/ALQ-170 recorder that is located in the system pod. To support the expanded radio suite, twelve additional antennas have been installed on the top and bottom of the aircraft.


23.3.1.1 Position Display Indicator. The pilot PDI is located on top of the pilot’s glareshield and the copilot PDI is installed on top of the copilot’s glareshield. Both PDI’s are mounted on hinges for ease of storage when not in use.

23.3.1.2 PDI Select Panel. PDI select panels are installed at the pilot and copilot side consoles. A three- position (center oft) switch on the select panels provide selection of information from the AN/ALQ-170 system podsatWS lZand15.

23.3.2 Power Requirements. The PDI select panel is supplied 28 Vdc from the main load center dc limiter bus. The PDI is supplied 28 Vdc from the selected wing store through the associated PDI select panel when wing store information is selected. PDI select panel lighting

power is provided by the pilot or copilot overhead side console lighting control. To apply power to the PDI select panels, press the following circuit breakers:

1. ARMAMENT POWER SEARCH STORES circuit breaker, located at the armament circuit breaker panel, forward leg electronics rack.


3. PDI SELECT circuit breaker, located at the mission circuit breaker panel at bay 45.

23.3.3 Operation. ThePDIselectpanelpertnitsthe operator to route AN/ALQ-170 information from either WS 12 or 15. Switch Sl on the select panel is a three- postion, center-off toggle switch that enables either Kl andK2 (for WS 12) orK3 andK4 (for WS 15) androutes pod information to the associated PDI. The center position deselects both WS relay banks. PDI information shown includes lock on, up, down, left, and right pod positions.

23-3 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

PART IX

Flightcrew Coordination

Contained in P3A/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1).

Chapter 24 - Flightcrew Coordination (General)

Chapter 25 -Aircrew Responsibilities


NAVAIR 0675PAA-I.3

CHAPTER 24

Flightcrew Coordination (General)

24.1 INTRODUCTION

The primary mission of the EPJJ aircraft is to conduct fleet readiness operations by simulatingthreatradar profiles and conducting communications mani- pulation to simulate hostile actions against carrier battle groups. Each crewmember plays a vital role in support of this mission and the EP3J was designed to be operated as an integrated team effort.

The TACYEWO shall be responsible for the tactical portion of the flight mission and shall coordinate the functions of the entire crew. The pilot, as aircraft commander, shall be responsible for the flightcrew being in their assigned positions for takeoff and landing (including ditching in an emergency). Each crewmember shall have individual responsibilities as described in the following paragraphs and in NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1, Chapter 8, Normal Procedures. Additional duties and responsibilities may be assigned by the pilot and TAC/ EWO as necessary.

Each crewmember shall possess a thorough knowledge of the equipment at his station plus have a familiarity with equipment used by other crewmen so that he can assume the duties in an emergency and facilitate normal crew coordination. Each crewmember is expected to be thoroughly familiar with safety and survival equipment in the aircraft and to be completely knowledgeable in the use and wearing of his personal equipment.

24.2 PLANE COMMANDER

24.2.1 Flight Planning

1. Review navigation planning and coordinate with NAV the desired routes and any deviations.

2. Review fuel planning with flight engineer.

24.2.2 Mission Planning

1. Attend any mission briefings prior to flight. Obtain information from the operational commander

regarding the mission objectives. Review all applicable message traffic.

2. Review operating area and determine restrictions and procedures for entering, operating, and exiting. Coordinate with all other airborne units for safety of flight separation.

3. Obtain weather information from HWD or other suitable prediction source.

4. Determine specific POD loads. Confer with EWO concerning the specific requirements of the mission and plan the tactical portion of the mission.

5. Review all aspects of required tactical air-to- ground and air-to-air communications, including frequencies, types of reports, and required encryption devices and publications.

24.2.3 Preflight

1. Review aircraft discrepancy log.

2. Coordinate with EWO and FE to ensure proper loading and inspection of mission essential equipment.

3. Preflight personal survival equipment includes the following:

a. LPA/SV2ihelmet

b. Parachute

c. Oxygen system

4. Ensure flight station preflight is completed in accordance with NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-12-l and other directives.

5. Conduct walkaround inspection of interior and exterior of the aircraft. Visually ensure loaded pods match loadout sheet.

24-l ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75&U-1.3

6. Conduct a brief prior to engine starts, including route of flight, tactical training scenario, emergency procedures, and applicable crew coordination items. Ensure all pod pins are visually sighted during the brief.

24.2.4 Start/Taxi. When required, set Condition V

24.2.5 Takeoff/Departure. Refer to NAVAIR Ol- 75PAC-1.

24.2.6 En Route

1. Monitor navigation equipment status and aircraft position. Review incoming message traffic and update tactics as necessary.

2. Prior to arriving on station establish communications with safety of flight unit to coordinate decon- fliction with on station units. Determine if surface units are in flight operations. Establish initial entry radial and altitude appropriate for mission.

24.2.7 Missions

1. Establish aircrat? at proper position and altitude.

2. Coordinate the efforts of the crew in order to complete the mission.

3. Ensure proper transponder codes are set and appropriate modes are strangled, if required.

4. Maintain VFR even under radar control. Vary mission altitude and profile to ensure VFR.

5. Ensure radar is used as the primary aid for obstacle avoidance and regularly receive radar fixing information on all hazards from the radar operator when the aircraft is below MOSA within 30 nm of land.

Displayed information on the pilot and TACI EWO scopes are subject to relative positional variance; therefore, the display shall not be relied upon as a substitute for primary terrain avoidance and standoff procedures.

Note l MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above

the highest obstacle within 30 nm ofthe aircraft.

ORIGINAL 24-2

l Procedures 3 and 4 may be modified at the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgement, the safety of the aircraft can be maintained visually in day- light VMC conditions.

24.2.6 Return. Ensure power to pods and all other EW systems are secured. Conduct a proper radio handoff with surface unit when switching to controlling agent for safety of flight and return clearance.

24.2.9 Postlanding/Taxi/Shutdown. Ensure that all mission equipment is properly secured. Turn in all mission paperwork to EWO and ensure aircraft is sanitized of classified material.

24.2.10 PostfIight. Ensure that equipment/program discrepancies are properly documented.

24.2.11 Debrief. Attend any mission debrief and ensure postmission report is transmitted (if required).

24.3 TACTICAL ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER


Review navigation planning and determine required takeoff time based on estimated en route time and on-station arrival time.

Determine requirement for special clothing and survival equipment utilizing predicted temperatures.

Inspect records of previous tactical equipment discrepancies to determine equipment status.


1. Attend any missionbriefings prior to flight. Obtain information from the operational commander regarding the mission objectives. Review all appli- cablemessagetraffic.DeterminePOD loadoutand crew personnel based on mission requirements.

2. Obtain weather information from HWD or other suitable prediction source.

3. Consult current tactical publications for special procedures. Determine specific POD loads and associated software/SK4 card requirements. Confer with pilot concerning the specific requirements of the mission and plan the tactical portion of the mission.

NAVAIR 01-75PAA.1.3

4. Review all aspects of required tactical air-to- ground and air-to-air communications, including frequencies, types of reports, and required encryption devices and publications.

5. Brief crew on all aspects of the tactical situation, POD loads, planned tactics, and tactical communications.

24.3.3 Preflight. The TAC/EWO shall be responsible for the preflight and operational checks ofequipment listed in this chapter. He is also responsible for the effective performance of the preflight checks performed by tactical crewmembers listed elsewhere in this chapter. Preflight and operational checks may be delegated to other qualified crewmembers.

1. Conduct exterior aircraft inspection, inspecting aircraft antennas for possible damage. Review all equipment discrepancies in the aircraft discrepancy log.

2. Conduct rack security check, TAC/EWO station hardware checks, and coordinated KS check in accordance withNAVAIR OOl-75PAA-12 series, and Crew Station Maintenance manuals. Monitor preflight status of all crewmembers to ensure timely takeoff.

3. Inspect all aircraft survival equipment.

4. Preflight personal survival equipment to include the following:

a. LPA/SV2/helmet

b. Parachute.

5. Ensure proper pods loading per the applicable checklist. Accompany the ordnanceman during inspection of the following:

a. Conventional weapon racks:

(1) Safety pins (upper and lower)

(2) Rack cocked (sear roller up on slide)

(3) Hooks latched (red dots)

(4) Umbilical connectors

(5) Sway braces.

6. Check for proper lighting indications with the wing status selector switches at both the TAC/EWO and flight station.

7. Ensure that all pods, electronic warfare and navigation equipment is preflighted and operationally ready for the assigned mission.

8. Ensure that required logs and forms are distributed.

9. Receive reports of preflight checklist completion by all other crewmembers. Report “TAC CREW checklist complete” to pilot specifying equipment status for all stations. TAC CREW checklist is as follows:

a. CommKrypto - Aboard.

b. Tapes (VHS, cassette, ASN-124) - As Required.

c. ALQ-170 SIM Cards/VHS tapes - As Required.

d. Camera/film!binoculars - As Required.

e. Laptop computer/battery pa&loader cable - Aboard.

f. TAtYEWObag - Aboard.

g. Crew preflight - Complete.

h. LTN-72 - NAV Mode.

i. Survival equipment - Checked.

j. IFT/ORD toolbox inventory - Complete.

k. NAV charts/logs - Aboard.

1. NFO Aircrew NATOPS - Aboard.

m. POD pins - Checked (prior to engine start).

n. Ladder up/door closed - Complete.

10. Conduct a briefat planeside ofthe updated tactical situation, emergency procedures, and applicable crew coordination items.

24.3.4 Taxi. When directed by the pilot to set Condi- tion V. inspect the aircraft for proper equipment stowage and crew readiness for takeoff. For night takeoff, the cabin should be darkened to provide adequate night vi-

24-3 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 91.XiPAA-I.3

sion for crewmembers in the event of an emergency. Report Condition V set to pilot.

24.3.5 Takeoff/Departure

1. Monitor UHF/VHF radios.

2. Upon setting Condition III, conduct an in-flight equipment check. In highdensitytrafftc areas, tactical crewmembers should use CONF 1 for ICS communications.

3. Determinethecapabilityoftheaircmfi tocomplete the assigned mission and report status ofali tactical stations to the pilot.

4. Coordinate the drafting of required reports with the in-flight communicator.

24.3.6 En Route

1. Monitor navigation equipment status and aircratl position. Review incoming message trafftc and update tactics as necessary.

2. Prior to arriving on station, apply power to PODS to ensure adequate warmup time.

24.3.7 Missions

1. Direct the pilot in the positioning ofthe aircraft by the use of fly-to-points. Update the pilot display with tactical information.

2. Coordinate the efforts of the crew in order to complete mission requirements.

3. During all operational and crew ttaining flights, when the aircraft is operating on station, display ail significant features (land, standoff, on-station areas, etc.) within 30 nm of the aircraft. Ensure pilot display, ASA-66, is updated accordingly.

4. Ensure. radar is used as the primary aid for obstacle avoidance and regularly receive radar fixing information on all hazards from the radar operator when the aircraft is below MOSA within 30 nm of land.

p&-ii&-(

Displayed information on the pilot and TACI EWO scopes are subject to relative positional variance; therefore, the display shall not be

relied on as a substitute for primary terrain avoidance and standoff procedures.

Note

MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle within 30 nm of the aircraft.

Procedures 3 and 4 may be modified at the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgement, the safety of the aircraft can be maintained visually in day- light VMC conditions.

5. Control frequency selection of UHF systems Nos. 2 through 6.

6. The tactical electronic warfare officer shall super- vise crewmembers and passengers in the cabin during emergencies.

24.3.6 Return. Monitor navigation equipment status and aircraft position. Ensure power to pods and all other EW systems are secured.

24.3.9 Descent/Approach. When directed by the pilot to set Condition V, inspect the aircraft for proper equipment stowage and crew readiness for landing. For night landing, the cabin should be darkened. Report Condition V set to pilot.

24.3.10 PostiandingITaxilShutdown. Ensure that all mission equipment is properly secured. Collect mission paperwork and ensure aircraft is sanitized of classified material.

24.3.11 Posfflight. Ensure that equipment/program discrepancies are properly documented.

24.3.12 Debrief. Attend any mission debrief and ensure postmission report is transmitted (if required).

24.4 NAVIGATOR ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER


1. Assist patrol plane commander in determining route to on-station.

2. Obtain current minimum altimeter settings and ditch headings from a HWD or other suitable weather forecast. The flight plan, Howgozit, and preflight log should be prepared by the pilots and the NAVIEWO utilizing predicted winds and temperatures.

ORIGINAL 24-4

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

3. Coordinate with the flight station on the status of warning areas, restricted areas, and NOTAM

4. Obtain appropriate charts of sufficiently small scale (usually 1:500,000 or 1: I,OOO,OOO) to provide maximum terrain depiction and fixing accuracy. The NAV/EWO shall ensure that all terrain, obstacles, restricted and warning areas, and any sensitive standoff areas are plotted on a suitable en route navigation chart. For on station, plot on the appropriate chart all obstacles, warning areas, any sensitive standoffarea, other hazards to navigation and minimum operational safe altitude. Plot and coordinate with the radar operator and flight station suitable radio aids to navigation.

Note MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle within 30 nm of theaircraft.

5. Ensure that the Howgozit chart is prepared in accordance with current instructions promulgated by the operational commander or for any flight sched- uled to operate in excess of 1,000 nm from the nearest suitable field. Coordinate fuel requirements with the patrol plane commander.

6. Ensure current flight information publications are obtained for navigation.

7. Review all equipment discrepancies in the aircraft discrepancy hook.

24.4.2 Mission Planning. Pertinent information regarding known or possible target positions, routes, flight planning, recognition, friendly units to be encountered en route, restricted areas, havens, and communication information should be clearly understood.

24.4.3 Preflight

1. Review aircraft discrepancy book.

2. Inventory all navigation equipment. The equipment is mandatory for all overwater flights for the following:

a. Appropriate charts

b. Forms

(1) Navigation logs

(2) Howgozit

(3) Message forms (including emergency).

c. Publications

(1) Navigation en route supplements and flight information handbook

(2) NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.1 (NFO/Aircrew NATOPS Manual)

(3) NAVAIR Ol-75-PAA- 1 (SUM).

d. Computers, divider set, appropriate plotters, pencils, erasers, tape, and grease pencils.

3. Review safety requirements for flight.

4. Initialization and preflight checks shall be conducted in accordance with NAVAIR Ol-75PAA- 12 series and/or NAVAIR 01 -PAA- 11.


a. LPAlSV2fhelmet

b. Parachute.

6. Obtain a cross-check from the TAC/EWO or PPC verifying that the precise aircraft position is entered in the inertial prior to acceptance of NAV mode for all overwater flights. The flight station shall verify the latitudeilongitude of the selected waypoint during en route navigation.

7. On any flight utilizing the LTN-72 positional and/or waypoint coordinates for navigation, a two- man rule is mandatory. A qualified crewmember may enter coordinates, but they must be verified by the PPC or TAC/EWO.

8. Report to tactical electronic warfare officer when checklist is completed. Report equipment that is inoperative or operating at reduced efftciency.

9. Conduct a detailed planeside brief of highest terrain at origin and destination route of flighthazards to navigation, warning and restricted areas, sensitive standoff areas, on-station MOSA, and ditch headings.

24.4.4 Start/Taxi

1. Ensure inertial accepted.

2. Turn on Doppler.

24-5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-1.3

3. Monitor or obtain from copilot clearance instructions.

4. Set barometric altimeter setting.

5. Obtain me1 reading (if required).


7. Prepare for GEO-correct on the runway numbers.

8. Set Condition V.

244.5 Takeoff/Departure

1. Perform GEO-correct on the runway numbers.


3. Upon initial Condition III being set, an in-flight equipment check shall be made. After the check has been performed, an equipment status report of the following equipment shall be given to the tactical electronic warfam officer. The tactical electronic warfare officer and pilots shall be informed as to which system is preferred for en route and tactical navigation.

a. All indicators (IAS, OAT, altimeter).

b. Heading information

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

-0

msw-0

ASN-124 (TH)

Wet compass (MH)

Magnetic variation.

C. Radio navigation aids

(1) ADF

(2) TACAN

(3) Omega.

d. TAS (MB-9, variance should not exceed 5 knots).

e. GS

(1) ASN-124 (NAV page)

(2) AF’N-153

(3) LTN-72.

f. Drift information

(1) APN-153

(2) LTN-72.

g. Wind information

(1) ASN-124 (NAVpage)

(2) LTN-72

(3) APN-153 (manual).

24.4.6 En Route

1. Monitor navigation equipment, aircraft position and obtain and plot an hourly fix of the aircraft position. Perform geographic corrects as required to update NAV systems and DR track. Notify flight station whenever intended flightpath will pass within 1,000 feet in altitude and within 30 nm of a hazard to navigation or a restricted area.

2. Reset barometric altimeter setting to 29.92 when required.

3. Maintain an accurate navigation log.

a. Specific log entries shall be made to indicate navigation system performance for initial in- flight equipment checks and for hourly system verification checks.

b. Full-line log entries shall be made when accomplishing the following:

(1) Departing a fix

(2) Determining a new wind

(3) Making a planned course change

(4) Starting a new log page

(5) Changing NAV/EWOs.

c. CH through GS entries shall be made when accomplishing the following:

(1) Altering heading for a change in drift

ORIGINAL 24-6

NAVAIR 01.XPAA-1.3

(2) Conducting hourly navigation system verification.

Note A checkmark indicates no change in that column since the last entry in that column. A blank box indicates that an entry is not applicable.

4. Update the Howgozit once per hour (if required). Magnetic variation shall be updated in the ASN-124 when MAG VAR is not being updated automatically.

24.4.7 Mission

1. When below MOSA, within 30 run of a hazard to navigation, monitor the aircraft DR position continuously and fix the aircraft position every one- half hour. When below MOSA within 30 mn of a hazard to navigation, the radar shall be the primary aid for obstacle a\;oidance. As directed by the pilot, theNAV/EWO electronic warfare officer shah brief the flight station on the aircraft position in relation to the closest terrain and a suitable safe escape heading. When descending on station, the NAV/EWO shall brief the flight station and crew on MOSA, safe escape headings, and high obstructions.

Note The above procedures may be modified at the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgement, the safety of the aircraft can be maintained visually in day- light VMC conditions.

In the event of navigation system uncer- tainty or navigation system failure in mar- ginal VMC, or IMC conditions, the aircrafi shall immediately climb to briefed MOSA on a suitable safe heading. The loss of radar should not constitute navigation system failure if accurate fixing is available.

2. Compute and log wind at least once each hour and for each significant change.

3. When a Howgozit is required, it shall be updated and shown to the pilot hourly.

4. Be prepared to assist the tactical EWO as directed in drafting all required reports. Be prepared at all times to give the in-flight communicator and copilot the aircraRposition for emergency transmission.

5. The NAViEWO shall notify the flight station whenever intended tlightpath will pass within 1,000 feet and 30 nm of a hazard to navigation or within 30 nm of a restricted area.

24.4.9 Return

1. At off station, fix the aircrafi position and update the system geographic position if necessary.

2. At off station, complete a navigation system accuracy check.

3. Reset barometric altimeter setting to 29.92 when required.

4. Monitor navigation equipment and aircratt position. Perform all other en route procedures as required.

24.4.9 Descent/Approach


2. Check in with flight station, obtain barometric altimeter setting, and coordinate MOSA.

3. Monitor approach ensuring all clearances avoid terrain, known obstacles, and warning and restricted areas.

4. When directed, set Condition V.

24.4.10 PostlandingRaxilShutdown

1. Close out the navigation log and till out the inertial data sheet or logbook as required.

2. Ensure that all navigation systems are secured prior to leaving the aircraft.

3. Ensure that all navigation equipment discrepancies are properly recorded.

24.5 C2W OFFICERS (C2Wl and C2W2)


1. Attend the mission brief as directed and review air and surface order-of-battle characteristics, obtain communications frequencies, and coordinate planned intrusion and-jamming tactics with the TACiEWO.

24-7 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-‘ISPAA-1.3

2. Ensure that sufftcient communications logs, cassette tapes, cassette recorder, card-of-the-day, and codeword documents are on board the aircraft.

3. Ensure that all available aids for COMM analysis and required reference material are on board the aircraft.

24.5.2 Preflight

1. Perform visual inspection of bays, racks, and equipment for security, and installation of all required components.


a. LPA/SVZ/helmet

b. Parachute.

3. Review safety requirements of flight. Annotate recordings and required logs with the minimum information at the beginning and end of the logs for following:

a. Classification

b. Date

c. EventNo

d. Aircrat? BuNo

e. Squadron

f. Crew

g. Aircraft commander

h. TAClEiWO

I. C2W of&et(s) 1 and 2

j. NAV/EWO

k. Time (for tapes and logs if required).

4. Perform operational checks of the C2W equip ment for the following:

a. Station lighting

b. USQ-113; Nos. 1 and 2

c. UHF radios; Nos. 3,4,5,6

d. MD-1203

e. MainICS

f. AUXICS

g. Time code generator.

5. Set and synchronize the time code generator with the NAVIBWO.

6. Participate in coordinated ICS checks with the CIXW.

7. Advise the TAC/EWO of equipment status and completion of preflight checklists.

24.5.3 Start/Taxi

1. Prior to engine turn-up, ensure power is secured to unnecessary equipment.

2. When directed by the pilot, set Condition V.


1. Upon initial Condition III being set, promptly perform the following:

a. USQ-113 - Power ON.

b. MD-1203 - Power ON.

c. Mission UHP radios

(1) Nos. 3,4,5, and 6 - Power - ON.

d. AUXICS

(1) Configure as required for use with USQ- 113 or mission UHPs.

e. VHSVCR

(1) Power - ON.

(2) Coordinate with radar operator to ensure VHSNCR tape is installedand QUED for proper recording with time code.

24.5.5 En Route

I. Prior to arriving ONSTA, perform the following:

a. USQ-113

ORIGINAL 24-5

NAVAIR WI-75PbU-1.3

(1)

(2)

(3)

Target tables - Load

Target tables - Store in nonvolatile memory

Ensure safety-of-flight frequency (cease BUZZER frequency) is loaded into ALERT frequency or monitored on one of the UHF mission radios.

b. MD-1203

(1) Signal generator - Set frequencies and tones as desired.

c. Mission UHF radios

(1) Nos. 3,4,5, and 6 - Set frequencies as needed.

Do not set UHF mission radios to Bequen- ties that may be jammed by the USQ-113 or other mission UHF radios, as damage to receivers might occur.

d. AUXICS

Note With AUX ICS selected, C2W stations are isolated from the main ICS system and will not hear normal ICS calls.

e. VHS VCR

(1) Coordinate with radar operator for ON/ OFF times for VHSNCR recorder.

24.5.6 Mission

1. Monitor radios and scanner for communications activity. Advise TAC/EWO on possible tighter intercepts and air defense posture as information be- comes available.

2. Coordinate with the flight station to ensure any intercepts by fighters are recorded:

a. Time of intercept

b. Position

C.

d.

e.

f.

Number and type of interceptors (modex, tail letters if visible)

Time interceptors detach

Position at detach.

Hostile intent (shouldering, wing rock, or flashing light signals).

3. Notify and coordinate with the TACYEWO prior to commencing intrusion or jamming of HF/VHFI UHF communications.

4. Task the in-flight communicator to monitor, record, and interfere with appropriate HF frequencies. Closely control and monitor the in-flight communicators performance to ensure objectives for mission are achieved.

5. Maintain appropriate logs of intrusion and jamming to include the following:

a. Frequencies.

b. Time: ON - OFF.

c. Utilization of frequency, if known (e.g., LINK, AAWC&R, FAD, CMDNET).

d. Responses to jamming and intrusion (i.e., intercept, kick, chattetmark, etc.).

e. Cease buzzer calls. Log call sign of umt mm- ating cease buzzer, and frequency(ies) affected if known. Obtain and log aircraft position from NAViEWO.

f. ONSTA, COMEX, FINEX, OFFSTA.

6. Coordinate closely with TACiEWO to maximize effectiveness during CTTG/ASMD and OPFOR raids.

24.5.7 Return

1. Secure all station equipment.

2. Perform postflight visual inspection of bays, racks, and all mission equipment.

3. Obtain all cassette tapes and place in secure storage.

4. Collect all classified information and documenta- tion and place in secure storage.

24-9 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-1.3

24.5.8 Descent/Approach. When directed by the pilot, set Condition V.

24.5.9 Postlandinflaxilshutdown. Collect C2W and in-flight communicator I-IF logs.

24.5.10 Postflight. Ensure all equipment discrepancies are properly documented.

24.5.11 Debrief. Attend mission debriefing with logs and tapes as directed.

24.6 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR


1. Ensure adequate teletype paper, crypt0 keying material, communication publications, and message blanks are taken along to complete the mission.

2. Review all equipment discrepancies in the aircraft discrepancy book.

24.6.2 Mission Planning. Attendmissionbrief,u- less otherwise directed, to acquire mission call sign, frequency plan, existing communication difficulties, or special instructions as deemed necessary by higher authority.

24.6.3 Preflight

1. The preflight and operational checks for individual systems shall not be initiated until a general visual inspection of each system is conducted. This inspection shall include rack security of the system components, and security of all connections and circuit breakers.

2. Conduct preflight checks for the following equipment:

a. KS

(1) Pilot

(2) Copilot

(3) Flight engineer

(4) Radio

(5) Starboard forward observer

(6) PA system

b. UHF-l and UHF-2

c. VHF/UHF (ARC-1 82)

d. VOR-I and VOR-2

e. Tacan

f. ADF

g. Radar altimeter

b. UHF/HF secure communications.

Flight recorder-locator

i. IFF mode 4

j. I-IF-I, HF-2 and HF-3 (receiver)

k. SATCOMM radio/KY-58.

3. Set IFF mode 2 and 4 codes.

4. Wind and set all aircraft clocks.

5. Preflight aircmR and personal survival equipment include the following:

a. LPAlSV2lbelmet

b. Parachute.

6. Review safety requirements for flight.

7. Keep tactical coordinator and in-flight technician informed during preflight of any equipment that is inoperative or operating at reduced eff%ziency. Re- port to tactical coordinator when preflight checklist is completed.

24.6.4 Taxi. When directed, set ConditionV.


1. Monitor I-IF/UHF/VHF radios

2. Act as a visual observer.

24.6.6 En Route/Mission

1. Condition III

a. Promptly establish communications with controlling station verifying that HF-1 and HF-2 are operating properly. Report to pilot that communications are established.

ORIGINAL 24.10

b. Report equipment status to tactical coordinator.

2. Monitor frequencies as directed by the pilot andby operational doctrine.

3. Request position from NAV/EWO 10 minutes prior to time position report is due.

4. Authenticate/challenge messages as directed.

5. Transmit messages when directed by mission commander or pilot in command when no mission commander is assigned.

6. Be prepared to transmit emergency messages at anytime.

7. Maintain logs as directed by communication doctorine/controlling activity.

Note Equipment operating procedures may be found by referring to NAVAIR Ol-75PAA- 11 (SUM). In-flight maintenance procedures may be found by referring to NAVAIR Ol- 15PAA-12 series.

24.6.7 DescentlApproach

1. When directed as visual observer, monitor HF/ UHF/VHF radios.


24.6.8 Postlandingfraxi

1. Zeroize the KY-58, KYV-5, and IFF modes 2 and 4 codes.

Select 29 MHz prior to securing ARC-190 system to prevent inadvertent damage by RF radiation from nearby transmitters. Do not load antenna.

2. Secure all equipment at the in-flight communicator station.

24.6.9 Postfllght

1. Inventory the communication box.

2. Properly record all radio discrepencies.

NAVAIR W75PAA-1.3

24.6.10 Debrief. Attend mission debriefing with appropriate logs and records as directed.

24.7 RADAR OPERATOR


1. Review all equipment discrepancies in the aircraft discrepancy book.

2. Obtain radar navigation charts of sufficient scale to provide maximum terrain depiction and fixing accuracy. These charts shall cover areas of iu- tended aircraft operations where significant navigation features affect the safety of flight. The radar operator shall coordinate with the NAV/EWO to plot suitable radar fix sites.

Note

Charts shall be of either 1:500,000 or I: l,OOO,OOO scale.


1. Obtain information regarding the mission objectives, target threat, and target characteristics.

2. Review safety requirements for flight (EMCON restrictions, route of flight).

24.7.3 Preflight

Ensure that bus checks and other necessity electrical interruptions are performed prior to initial turn-on procedures.

1. Conduct electronic warfare operator station hardware checks and coordinated ICS check per NAVAIR 01-75PAA-12-5.

2. Preflight personal safety/survival equipment to include the following:

a. LPA/SVZ/helmet

b. Parachute.

24.7.4 StatVlaxi

1. APS-80 STAB/OUT switch to OUT.

24-l I ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

STAB-OUT switch shall be placed in the out position for takeoff and landing to prevent possible damage to the antenna and tilt stabalization system.

3. IRDS turret retracted (if applicable).

1 WARNING 1

To ensure turret area is clear of equipment or personnel, post an outside observer prior to extending or retracting turret.

,4. Report IRDS status to pilot as required.

5. Secure all loose gear at/around station.

6. Set Condition V when directed.


1. Upon Condition III being set by the tactical coordinator, the electronic warfare operator will conduct in-flight equipment checks for the following:

a. MW-2 for correct true heading.

b. Radar system (as EMCON conditions permit)

Note

Prior to applying high voltage to APS-80 system, coordinate with the flight station to ensure color weather radar is not in use.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Both APS-80 systems for proper display on the APA- or OK-620/APQ control indicator.

Antenna sweep in full scan, 210° sector, and 45O sector.

Antenna tilt in STAB-OUT and STAB-IN contigumtions.

APA- 125 or OK-62O/APQ control indicator for correct true heading.

APA- and ID-499 or OK-620lAPQ control indicator group for ground track.

c. AAS- IRDS

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Coordinate extension of IRDS turret with the pilot.

Select MAN TRK, then BIT ON.

Adjust video level, gain, contrast, and brightness; ensure that 10 shades of gray are visible.

Ensure target tracking sight control will correctly operate turret in all modes.

2. Electronic warfare operator shall report equipment status to TACiEWO on completion of Condition III check.

24.7.6 En Route

1. The tactical crew as well as the flight station crew must be aware of all factors that may affect safety if accidents are to be avoided. Whenever operation of the radar is permitted, it should be used to en- hance safety of flight. The electronic warfare operator can provide the following:

a. Radar vectors to avoid hazardous weather conditions. Use of the lowest practical range scale and the FTC function can improve weather definition.

Heavy htrbulence and hail may extend out- ward as far as 20 miles from a fully developed thunderstorm cell or cells.

b.

C.

Clearance from terrain and other obstructions during low-level operations. Familiarity with navigation charts will provide information as to the location of known terrain obstructions.

Use of navigation charts and a knowledge of expected aircraft track utilized in conjunction with the radar presentation can be useful in the event of navigation equipment failure or as a backup for other navigation equipment.

2. Electronic warfare operator shall conduct only offset radar run-ins taking into account weather and visibility.

ORIGINAL 24-12

NAVAIR 0%75?AA-1.3

3. When the aircraft is operating within 30 run of land and below minimal operational altitude, the radar shall become the primary aid for obstacle avoidance and shall be used continuously. As directed by the pilot, the radar operator shall brief the flight station on the aircraft position in relation to the closest terrain and/or other hazards to navigation and be prepared to provide a suitable escape heading.

Note

a MOSA is defined as 1,000 feet above the highest obstacle within 30 nm of the aircraft.

a The above procedures may be moditiedat the discretion of the aircraft commander when, in his judgment, the safety of the aircraft can be maintained visually in day- light VMC conditions.

l During certain EMCON conditions or operational missions, the use of radar may jeopardize the crew and aircrafi. In these situations, the use of mdar shall be at the discretion of the mission commander.

24.7.7 Mission

1. When challenged, respond to flight descent checklist with appropriate response.

2. Operate radar, MAD, ESM, IRDS, and IFF systems and subsystems as directed by the TAU EWO to support the mission.

3. Maintain safety of flight as per in-flight safety procedures outlined in en route section.

4. Report targets to the tactical coordinator.

5. Provide steering information to the pilot as directed by the tactical coordinator,

6. Provide the NAV/EWO with radar fix infonna- tion, and other navigation information.

7 . Use ASN- 124 marker entry controller, as directed.

24.7.8 DescenffApproach

1. When challenged, respond to flight descent checklists with appropriate response.

2. Maintain safety of flight as per in-flight safety procedures outlined in en route section.

3. Prior to landing, ensure the following takes place:

a. Station is properly rigged for landing (no gear adrift).

b. AF’S-80 STAB to OUT.

c. IRDS turret is retracted.


5. Monitor approach and landing on UHPiVHP.

24.7.9 Postflight

1. Prior to leaving the aircraft, ensure the following steps are accomplished:

a. EWO electronic equipment secured.

b. All equipment discrepancies logged.

c. Coordinate postflight with other crewmen in accordance with current NAVAIR directives.

24.7.10 Debrief. Attend mission debriefing with appropriate logs and records as directed.

24-13 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR WI-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 25

Aircrew Responsibilities

Contained in NAVAIR Ol-75PAG1


NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

PART X

Natops Evaluation

Conk&d in PJA/Et/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1).

Chapter 26 - NATOPS Evaluation


NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 26

NATOPS Evaluation

26.12 FLIGHT STATION CHECKRIDE

Refer to P-3A/B/C NATOPS Flight Manual NAVAJR Ol-75PAC-1.

26.13 TACTICAL COORDINATOR/ ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

AREA A: GROUND PROCEDURES/BRIEF

1.

l 2.

On-station situation/crew coordination

Qualified - Thorough brief performed concem- ing on-station situation to include target threat and crew coordination consideration (i.e., CCIKCJ and EW systems employment, aircraft altitude, navigation system utilization, equipment employment, weapon utilization and settings, and battle/ flight conditions).

Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from above.

Unqualified - Failed to brief crew adequately.

Safety of flight/communication procedures

Qualified - Thorough briefing performed concerning safety of flight to include MOSA pmce- dures and air-to-air/air-to-ground communications.


Unqualified - Failed to brief crew adequately.

3. Aircraft status

*Critical Areas/Subareas

Qualified-Inspected records of previous tactical equipment discrepancies, determined equipment status, and briefed crew.

Conditionally Qualifkd - lncomctly determined aircraft status horn previous equipment discrepancies.

Unqualitied - Failed to review previous equip ment discrepancies.

*AREA B: PREFLIGHT

* 1. Safety and survival equipment

Qualified-Personal survival gear properly fitted and worn. Demonstrated thorough knowledge and utilization ofrequiredpersonal and general aircraft safety and survival equipment.

Conditionally Qualified- Minor omissions noted or minor lack of knowledge of personal or aircraft safety and survival equipment.

Unqualified-Unfamiliarwith theuse of required equipment.

‘2. Equipment/circuit breaker location

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of aircraft electronic equipment/circuit breaker location.


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with aircraft electronic equipment/circuit breaker location.

3. System knowledge

Qualified - Demonstrated a basic knowledge of aircraft systems to include normal and degraded operating modes.

26-1 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

c. Ev*L”*T,ON N”MERlcAL GRADE

f* EvAL.UATlON ADJECTNE mADE

Asterisk (‘1 denotes critical arealsubarea

Figure 26-I. TAUEWO NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 1 of 2)

N 10197

ORIGINAL 26-2

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

I

N10197

Figure. 26-l. TACYEWO NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

26-3

‘4.

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with aircraft systems.

Equipment readiness

Qualified- Ensured all readiness checks outlined in the TACCO Crew Station Manual completed, including proper pod loading procedures and preflight operation.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions from above.

Unqualified-Failed to perform equipmentreadi- ness checks.

5. Readiness for taxi/takeoff

Qualified- Ensured tactical crew checklist completed, Condition V properly set and reported to PPC. Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seat back fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened. No loose gear at station.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor omissions from above.

Unqualified - Failed to properly prepare for taxi/ takeoff.

*AREA C: CREW COORDINATION

* 1. Tactical crew coordination

Qualified-Positively directed the positioning of the aircraft during the tactical evolution. Kept the pilots well informed of the progress of the tactical situation. Coordinated all information received from other EW crewmembers and properly directed the activities of the entire crew.


Unqualified-Major discrepancies in above resulted in the unsatisfactory prosecution of the mission.

‘2.

‘3.

Condition of flight

Qualified - Coordinated the proper setting of conditions of flight with flight station.

Conditionally Qualified-Did not properly COOL-

dinate setting conditions of flight.

Unqualified - Failed to ensure proper navigational procedures used or to coordinate MOSA procedures. Lack of knowledge of celestial procedures.

Positional awareness

Qualified - Ensured proper navigational procedures used. Coordinated MOSA procedures.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor discrepancies from above.

Unqualified -Failed to ensure pmper navigational procedures used to coordinate MOSA procedures. Lack of knowledge of celestial pmcedums.

*AREA D: TACTICAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION

1. Displays

*2.

‘3.

Qualified - Effectively used aircraft tactical displays to manage systems and information.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from the above.

Unqualified - Failed to effectively use tactical displays to manage systems and information.

Software

Qualified - Effectively employed TACCO so& ware functions.


Unqualified- Mission not accomplished because of poor use of the TACCO software functions.

EW equipment utilization


ORIGINAL 26-4

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of EW systems and effective utilization.


Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of EW systems and utilization.

‘4. Tactical communication

Qualified - Effectively coordinated required message traffic/contact reports; demonstrated a thorough knowledge of radios and KS system.


Unqualified - Failed to coordinate message traffic. Inadequate knowledge of radios or ICS system.

AREA E: NAVIGATION/ARMAMENT CONTROL PANEL

1. Navigation systems

Qualitied- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of navigation fixing systems to include ASN-124, LTN-72, ARN-99, GPS.


Unqualified- Lack of familiarity with equipment that could have significantly affected success of mission.

2. Celestial computation/plotting

Qualified - Demonstrated a proficiency in observing, computing, and plotting celestial bodies.


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with celestial observation, computation, or plotting.

3. Navigation system monitoring

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge ofroutine velocity, TAS, and heading checks. Co- ordinated MOSA procedures.

Conditionally Qualified -Minor deviations from above.

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with routine velocity, TAS, and heading checks.

4. Armament control panel

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of armament control panel, emergency pod release, and jettison procedures.


Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of pod release procedures.

‘AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

* 1. Fire of unknown origin

Qualified - Properly directed crew efforts in locating and fighting the tire. Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of individual crewmember duties. Continuouslyreportedprogress totheflight station.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergency procedures. Did not effectively assist pilot in directing crew in the emergency situation.

Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of emergency procedure.

*2. Ditching

Qualified - Timely preparation executed by crewmembers and passengers. Station fully rigged for ditching, Condition V set in cabin, jettison monitored.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor discrepancies from above.

Unqualified - Stations not fully rigged for ditching; loose gear adrift in cabin. Significant lack of knowledge of crewmember responsibilities.

‘3. Bailout

Qualified - Timely preparation executed by crewmembers and passengers. Properly donned parachute and other personal equipment.


26-5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3


Unqualified- Improperly donned parachute, untimely preparation, lack of knowledge of bailout procedures.

4. Other emergency procedures

Qualified - Properly reacted to simulated emergencies such as smoke/fume removal, APU fire, brake fire, explosive/rapid decompression. Displayed thorough knowledge of emergency procedures.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergency procedures. Did not effectively assist pilot in directing crew in emergency situation.

Unqualified - Lacked significant knowledge of emergency procedures.

AREA G: LANDRKYPOSTFLIGHT

1. Preparation for landing

Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seat back fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened. No loose gear at station.


Unqualified-Did not set Condition V.

2. Postflight procedures

Qualified - Ensured all EW and navigation equipment secured. Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and records as directed. Maintenance discrepancies reported.


Unqualified- Failed to attend mission debriefing with appropriate logs and records as indicated or failed to debrief maintenance discrepancies.

26.1 4 NAVIGATOR/ELECTRONIC WARFARE OFFICER NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

AREA A: GROUND PROCEDURES/BRIEF

* 1. Appropriate charts and navigation publications

Qualified-Properly prepared for assigned flight with complete set of appropriate charts and publications on board. Logs and charts preflighted with route of flight, known obstacles, and terrain. Re- stricted, warning, and sensitive standoff areas clearly marked.

Conditionally Qualified-Missing an appropriate chart or publication or missing some information not considered to jeopardize safety of flight or preclude successful completion of mission.

Unqualified-Missing appropriate charts or publications or missing some information that would preclude successful completion of mission.

*2. Weather, wind, and hazards to navigation

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of all factors affecting flight safety along the intended route of flight. Properly prepared for assigned flight with complete preflight logs.

Conditionally Qualified - Missing some information along the route of flight not considered to jeopardize the safety of flight or preclude completion of mission.

Unqualified -Missing important information that would affect the safe completion of the mission.

3. Aircraft status/maintenance records

Qualified - Review airma navigation system maintenance records.

Conditionally Qualified - Incorrectly determined a&rat? status from previous equipment discrepancies.

Unqualified - Failed to review previous equipment discrepancies.


ORIGINAL 26-6

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA.1.3

*4. Planeside brief

Qualified-Briefcdcrewonallaspectsofenroute and on-station weather, winds, warning area status, and route of flight with known obstacles, significant terrain, and MOSA.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from above.

Unqualified-Failed to brief crew.

*AREA B: PREFLIGHT

* 1. Safety and survival equipment

Qualified- Personal survival gear properly fitted and worn. Demonstrated thorough knowledge and utilization ofrequired personal and general aircraft safety and survival equipment.

Conditionally Qualified-Minoromissionsnoted or minor lack of knowledge ofpersonal or aircraft safety and survival equipment.

Unqualified-Unfamiliarwith theuseofrequired equipment.

*2. Equipment/circuit breaker location

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of aircraft electronic equipment/circuit breaker location.


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with aircraft electronic equipment/circuit breaker location.

3. System knowledge

Qualified -Demonstrated a basic knowledge of aircrat? systems to include normal and degraded operating modes.


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with aircraft systems.

*4. Equipment readiness


Qualified-Ensured all readiness checks outlined in the TACCO Crew Station Manual completed.


Unqualified- Failed to perform equipment readiness checks.

5. Readiness for taxi/takeoff

Qualified - Ensured tactical crew checklist completed, Condition V properly set and reported to PPC. Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seat back fully erect, seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened. No loose gear at station.


Unqualified-Failed to properly prepare for taxi/ takeoff.

AREA C: CREW COORDINATION

1. Knowledge of crewmember duties

Qualified- Demonstrated knowledge andunder- standing of the duties and responsibilities of each crewmember.

Conditionally Qualified-Not familiarwithsome crewmember duties and responsibilities.

Unqualified - Inadequate knowledge of crewmember duties and responsibilities.

2. Knowledge of conditions of flight

Qualified - Demonstrated understanding of Flight Conditions II, III, IV, and V.

Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understand all the implications of the flight conditions.

Unqualified - Lacked understanding of flight conditions.

AREA D: TACTICAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION

* 1. Navigation heading/tracking systems

26-7

NAVAIR Oi-75PAA-1.3

‘2.

Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of the proper use of all heading/tracking systems.


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity that could have significantly affected success of mission.

Navigation positioning/fixing systems

Qualified-Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of the proper use of all positioning/fixing systems.


Unqualified-Lack of familiarity with equipment could have significantly affected the success ofthe mission.

3. Radios/KS

4.

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of radiosiICS equipment.

Conditionally Qualified- Minor deviations from the above.

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with equipment that could have significantly affected success of mission.

Navigation/pod utilization

Qualified-Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of peripheral navigation systems to include IAS, altimeter, OAT, TAS, and utilization of AST-4, AST-6, ALQ-167, ALE-43, ALQ-170 pods and associated control boxes.

Conditionally Qualitied - Minor deviations from the above.

Unqualified - Demonstrated a lack of familiarity with equipment that could have significantly affected success of mission.

‘AREA E: IN-FLIGHT NAVIGATION PROCEDURES

‘1. Hourly position and wind requirements

*2. Navigation systems monitoring

Qualified-Obtained, plotted, and logged the best possible position and wind at least once per hour.


Unqualified-Failed to obtain, plot, or log positions or wind.

Qualified - Properly monitored navigation systems and conducted routine velocity, TAS, and heading checks. Flight station notified whenever aircraft altitude passed to within 1,000 feet above a hazard to navigation or restricted area within 30 nm of intended route of flight.


Unqualified - Failed to monitor systems and/or conduct routine system checks. Failed to notify flight station of navigation hazards or restricted areas.

*3. Celestial observation/computation/plotting

Qualified - Demonstrated a proficiency in observing, computing, and plotting celestial bodies.


Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with celestial observation/computation/plotting.

*AREA F: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES


Qualified-Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of individual crewmember duties. Demonstrated proper use of fire extinguisher, oxygen bottles, and similar equipment. Promptly reported to the TAC/ EWO the status of the emergency message.


Unqualified-Improper use of emergency equipment that may have resulted in personal injury or death to himself or other crewmembers. Signifi- cant lack of knowledge of required duties.


ORIGINAL 26-S

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

‘2. Ditching

*3.

*4.

Qualified - Properly completed in a timely manner all emergency communication duties. Demon- strated knowledge of all crewmember duties, exits, location of liferafts. Station fully rigged for ditching.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor discrepancies t?om above.

Unqualified - Failed to prepare emergency message in a timely manner. Lacked significant knowledgeofcrewmemberresponsibilities. Loose gear adrift. NAV/EWO station not fully rigged for ditching.

Bailout

Qualified - Prepared emergency message and properly donned parachute in a timely manner. Thorough knowledge of bailout and postbailout procedures.


Unqualified - Failed to prepare emergency message in a timely manner. Improperly or untimely donning of parachute. Lack of knowledge of bailout or postbailout procedures.

Emergencies (other)

Qualified - Properly reacted to simulated emergencies such as smoke/fume removal, APU tire, brake fire, explosive/rapid decompression. Displayed thorough knowledge of emergency procedures.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergency procedures. Did not ef- fectivelyassist pilot in directing crew in emergency situation.


Cl.

AREA G: LAHDIHGiPOSTFLIGHT

1. Preparation for landing

Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seat back fully erect,

seat fully lowered, headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened. No loose gear at station.


Unqualified - Deviations that would present a safety hazard resulting in injury or death.


Qualified - Ensured all EW and navigation equipment secured and all logs and records complete.


Unqualified - Failed to secure navigation equipment or complete logs and records.

3. Maintenance debrief

Qualified -Navigation system discrepancies properly recorded and INS error data logged/ reported.


Unqualified - Failed to record maintenance discrepancies or log/report INS error data.

26.15 IN-FLIGHT COMMUNICATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

*AREA A: PREFLIGHT

Flight planning

Qualified - Attended brief as directed and bad knowledge of known equipment discrepancies. Had adequate teletype paper, crypt0 keying material, communication publication, and message blanks on board. Had knowledge of frequencies and call signs expected to be used during the flight.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions noted.

Unqualified - Insufficient teletype paper or crypt0 keying material on board, no communication publications on board, or bad no knowledge


26.9 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

EP9J MOD INFLIGHT COMMUNICATOR NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

REQUIREMENT DATE COMPLETED

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

N 10197

Figure 26-Z. MOD In-Flight Communicator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 1 of 2)

ORIGINAL 26-10

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA.1.3

EP-3J MOD INFLIGHT COMMUNICATOR NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

Figure 26-2. MOD In-Flight Communicator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

26-11 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA.1.3

of frequencies and call signs expected to be used during flight. InsuffIcient knowledge of known equipment discrepancies.

2. Knowledge of APU

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of APU visual inspection and operational limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of APU.

Unqualified - Significant lack of knowledge of APU.

‘3. Positional preflight

Qualified-Performed a complete visual inspection and demonstrated a thorough knowledge of preflight procedures. Properly evaluated results of tests and checks.

Conditionally Qualified - Omissions and deviations from visual inspection and/or preflight resulting in partial determination or equipment status or did not demonstrate a thorough knowledge of preflight procedures.

Unqualified - No visual inspection or preflight performed or major discrepancies resulting in erroneous determination of equipment status or lacked significant knowledge of NATOPS preflight procedures.

*4. Personal survival equipment

Qualified - Safety and survival equipment complete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute. Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of use and location of personal survival equipment.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions or deviations noted.

Unqualified- Equipment not completed or major omissions or deviations noted from Qualified.

5. Equipment status report (to TACYEWO)

Qualified-Reported results ofequipment checks and tests to the TACYEWO, indicating which


equipment is inoperative or operating at reduced efficiency.

Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a complete or timely status report.

Unqualified - Failed to report equipment status to TACIEWO.

AREA B: PRETAKEOFF

*I. Knowledge of conditions of flight

Qualified- Demonstrated knowledge andunder- standing of Flight Conditions II, III, IV, and V.

Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understand all the implications of all flight conditions.

Unqualified - Had no knowledge of the flight conditions or lacked understanding of them.

*2. Knowledge of observer duties

Qualified - Established ICS communications with the flight station prior to engine starts. Dem- onstrated proper procedures for monitoring engine starts and contact reporting. Complied with safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.


Unqualified - Failed to establish KS communications or lacked knowledge of procedures for monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts. Failed to observe safety precautions as outlined in apphcable directives.

‘3. Preparation for takeoff


Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted from those items listed above.

Unqualified - Deviations that would present a potential safety hazard could result in injury or death.

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

AREA C: AFTER TAKEOFF

1. In-flight equipment checks/communications established

Qualitled - Initiated checks of assigned equipment immediately when Condition III set. Promptly established (attempted to establish) communications with controllmg station as soon as practicable after setting of Condition IIl or on command of the mission commander.

Conditionally Qualified - Unable to establish communications because of lack of familiarity with communication equipment or publications, causing undue delay. Did not check all assigned equipment.

Unqualified - Unable to establish communications because of equipment malfunctions over- looked during equipment preflight or no attempt made to establish communications expeditiously. Did not check any assigned equipment.

2. Reported communication conditions to pilot

Qualitied - Properly reported to the pilot the establishment of communications with controlling station.

Conditionally Qualified-Undue delay in reporting establishment of communications to pilot.

Unqualified - Failure to report establishment of communications to pilot.

3. Equipment status report

Qualified - Promptly reported results of equipment checks to TAC/EWO.

Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give complete status repott.

Unqualified - Failed to report results of equipment checks to TAUEWO.

*AREA D: GENERAL AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT

*l. Aircraft emergency, safety, and survival equipment

‘2. Aircraft systems and circuit breaker location

Qualified- Had a detailed knowledge of location and use of fire extinguisher, portable oxygen bottles, first-aid kits, tire ax, water breakers, antiex- posure suits, liferafts, emergency radios, emergency buoy, exit lights, and other equipment ofthis general category.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of those items listed above.

Unqualified - Demonstrated a significant lack of knowledge or understanding of those items listed above.

Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of contents and circuit breaker location of the hydraulic service center and the main electrical load center. Had knowledge of circuit breaker and equipment location of the inertial, AHRS, UHF 1 and 2, VHF, VOR 1 and 2, tacan, ADF, marker beacon, IFF, altimeter, autopilot, cabin exhaust fan, and other systems normally energized for minimum crew evaluations.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from those listed above.

Unqualified - Had significant lack of knowledge of those items listed above.

AREA E: POSITIONAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION/KNOWLEDGE

*l. HF-1, HF-2, and HF-3

Qualified-Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of the controls, operation, and limitations of the transceivers, HF couplers, loran coupler and I-IF control boxes.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked thorough knowledge of equipment operation and limitations. Did not fully understand the function(s) of all operating controls.

Unqualified-Lack of familiarity with equipment that could result in damage to equipment. Signiti- cantly lacked a detailed knowledge of equipment controls and/or unfamiliar with equipment operation and limitations.


26-13 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-XiPAA-1.3

2. MD 1201

Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all equipment operating controls and equipment capabilities and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of MD 1201 equipment that could result in damage to equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with MD 1201 equipment that could result in damage to equipment.

3. Teletype

Qualified-Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of the controls, operation, and limitations of the teletypewriter and TTY crypt0 unit. Had knowledge of security precautions pertaining to the TTY crypt0 unit.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a thorough knowledge of equipment operation and limitations. Did not fully understand the function(s) of all operating controls.

Unqualitied-Lackofknowledgeofsecuritypre- cautions that could result in the disclosure of classified material. Significantly lacked a thorough knowledge of equipment controls and/or unfamiliar with equipment operation and limitations.

4. ICS equipment

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of all functions and capabilities of the KS. Had knowledge of all operating controls and their functions.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a thorough knowledge of KS. Not familiar with all ICS operating controls.

Unqualified - Failed to demonstrate a thorough knowledge of ICS functions and capabilities. Sig- nificantly lacked understanding of ICS operating controls and their functions.

5. Logs and records

Qualified-Maintained all logs and kept records


completely neat and up-to-date at all times.

Conditionally Qualified - Some information incomplete. Logs were confusing and obviously disordered.

Unqualified - Did not maintain logs and records of flight.

‘6. Communications procedures

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of communication publications/plans and procedures. Demonstrated proper authentication procedure and familiarity with contents and use of crypt0 publications carried on the aircraft. Dem- onstrated a thorough knowledge of current instmc- tions for security of classified material.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations or omissions noted from above.

Unqualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of communication publications/plans or procedures. Demonstrated improper use of authentication tables or unfamiliarity with the contents and use of crypt0 publications. Demonstrated a lack of knowledge of current instructions for security of classified material that could result in a security violation.



Qualified-Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of duties, equipment, and circuit breaker location. Demonstrated properuse of tire extinguisher, oxygen bottles, and similar equipment. Promptly investigated and reported situation to TAC/EWO.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from items required for Qualified.

Unqualified - Demonstrated improper use of emergency equipment that could have resulted in persona1 injury or death either to himself or other crewmembers. Significant lack of knowledge of required duties.

*2. Ditching

ORIGINAL 26-14

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Qualified - Properly rigged station in a timely manner. Had a thorough knowledge of duties, exits, and pertinent survival equipment.


Unqualified - Stations not fully rigged for ditching. Loose gear adrift. Lacked significant knowledge of responsibilities.

*3. Bailout

Qualified - Familiar with bailout signal(s). Had knowledge of parachute location, bailout exit location. Properly donned parachute and other personal equipment. Was timely in his preparation.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from the items required for Qualified.

Unqualified-Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lacked knowledge ofparachute location or bailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked personal survival items.

‘4. Other emergency procedures

Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of procedures for other emergencies such as smoke/fume removal, APU tire, brake tire, explosive/rapid decompression.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of emergency procedures.

Unqualified - Lacked a significant amount of knowledge of emergency procedures.

AREA G: LANDING/POSTFLIGHT

* 1. Preparation for landing



Unqualified - Deviations that would present a potential safety hazard that could result in injury or death.


Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of postflight responsibilities, ensuring all equipment secured. Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and reported as directed. All equipment discrepancies properly logged.

Conditionally Qualified- Minor omissions in securing equipment or logging discrepancies.

Unqualified - Improper handling of classified material or major omissions of those items under Qualified.

26.16 RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

‘AREA A: PREFLIGHT

* 1. Flight planning

Qualified - Attended brief and had knowledge of known equipment discrepancies. Obtained suf- ticient VHS videotapes, logs, writing instruments. Suitable charts (radar navigation) available.

Conditionally Qualified - Insufficient logs, writing instruments, or video tapes.

Unqualified - No VHS tapes or logs. In- sufficient knowledge of known equipment discrepancies.

2. Knowledge of APU

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of APU visual inspection and oper-ational limitations.



*3. Positional preflight

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of NATOPS preflight procedures including BZ


26-l 5 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

EP-3J MOD RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

NATOPS EVALUATION

3. POSITIONAL PREFUGHT

Nt0/97

Figure 26-3. MOD Radar Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 1 of 2)

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

EP3J MOD RADAR OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

:. EMEROENCY PRrxEO”RES ADJECTNE AREA GRADE

SUBAREAS 0 co ” POlNTS , 1. FIREOF UNKNOWN ORlOIN EvN.“ATlON AOJECTNE GRADE

- (OPNNINST 3710.7, I

2. DlTCHlNG

4. 07”ER EMERGENCY PROCEDURES I I I I I

Asterisk (‘) denotes titicat areahbarea NlOl97

Figure. 26-3. MOD Radar Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

26-17 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

and VHS recording and annotation. Properly evaluated results and initiated corrective action for all discrepancie-s.

Conditionally Qualified - Omissions and deviations from preflight resulted in partial dete.rmi- nation of equipment status or did not demonstrate a tborougb knowledge of NATOPS preflight pro- CdUlW.

Unqualified - No preflight performed or major omissions resulting in erroneous determination of equipment status. Significantly lacked howledge of NATOPS preflight procedures. No VHS video recording or tape annotation.

*4. Personal survival equipment

Qualified - Safety and survival equipment complete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute. Demonstrated a thorougb knowledge of use and location of personal survival equipment.


Unqualified - Equipment preflight not com- pletedormajoromissionsordeviationsnotedfrom Qualified.

5. Equipment status report (to TAC/EWO)

Qualified - Reported results of equipment checks and tests to tbe TACYEWO, indicating which equipment is inoperative or operating at reduced capability.

Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a corn- plete or timely status report.

Unqualified - Failed to report equipment status to TACIEWO.

ARBA B:,PRETAKEOFF

*l. Knowledge of conditions of flight

Qualified - Demonstrated knowledge and understanding of Battle Condition I and Flight Con- ditions II, III, IV, and V.


l 2.

Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understand all tbe implications of Battle Condition I and/or tbe flight conditions.

Unqualified - Had no knowledge of tbe battle condition/flight conditions or lacked understanding of them.

Knowledge of observer duties

Qualified - Established ICS communications with tbe tligbt station prior to engine starts. Dem- onstratedproperproceduresformonitoringengine starta and contact reporting. Complied with safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.


Unqualified - Failed to establish ICS communications or lacked knowledge of procedures for monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts. Failed to observe safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.

l 3. Preparation for takeoff

Qualified - Helmet donned (as directed), visor down and locked, gloves on, seat back fully erect, seat fully lowered. Headrest properly extended, and lapbelt and shoulder harness securely fastened. No loose gear at station.



ARBA C: AFTER TAKEOFF

1. In-flight equipment checks

Qualified - Initiated checks of assigned equip ment immediately when Condition III set.


Unqualified - Failed to check equipment when Condition III set.


ORIGINAL 25-15

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3


Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give complete status report.

Unqualified - Failed to report results of equipment checks to TAC/EWO.

‘AREA D: GENERAL AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT

* 1. Aircmfi emergency, safety, and survival equipment

Qualified - Had a detailed knowledge of location and use of fire extinguishers, portable oxygen bottles, first-aid kits, tire ax, water breakers, anti- exposure suits, liferafts, emergency radios, emergency sonobuoy, exit lights, and other equipment of this general category.


Unqualitied - Demonstrated a significant lack of knowledge or understanding of those items listed above.

*2. Aircraft systems and circuit breaker location

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge ofcontents and circuit breaker location of the hydraulic service center and the main electrical load center. Had knowledge of circuit breaker and equipment location of the inertial, AHRS, UHF 1 and 2, VHF, VOR 1 and 2, tacan, ADF, marker beacon, IFF, altimeter, autopilot, cabin exhaust fan, and other systems normally energized for minimum crew evaluations.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from those listed above.

Unqualified - Had significant lack of knowledge of those items listed above.

AREA E: EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION

* 1. Radar equipment

Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all radar/B* equipment operating controls and equipment limitations and capabilities.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of all radar/B* equipment limitations and capabilities. Did not understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with radar/B’ that could result in damage to equipment or personnel. Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of radar/B eqmpment controls and equipment capabilities and limitations or failed to meet the requirements of Conditionally Qualified.

2. BZ system

Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all equipment operating controls and equipment capabilities and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of B* equipment that could result in damage to equipment, personnel or limit capabilities. Did not understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified - Lack of familiarity with B* equipment that could result in damage to equipment or personnel. Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of B’ equipment controls and equip ment capabilities and limitations or failed to meet the requirements of Conditionally Qualified.

3. VHS video recorder

Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of VHS video equipment operating controls and equipment capabilities and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked detailed knowledge of VHS video capabilities and limitations. Did not understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified - Lacked familiarity with VHS video equipment that could result in damage to equipment. Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of video equipment controls and capabilities and limitations or failed to meet requirements of Conditionally Qualified.

4. KS equipment

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of all functions and capabilities of the ICS.


26-19 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Had knowledge of all operating controls and their functions.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a thorough knowledge of ICS. Not familiar with all ICS operating controls.

Unqualified - Failed to demonstrate a thorough knowledge of ICS functions and capabilitiessig- niticantly lacked understanding of ICS operating controls and their functions.

5. Logs and records

Qualified - Maintained all radar/B’ logs and kept records completely, neat and up-to-date at all times.

Conditionally Qualified - Some information incomplete. Logs were confusing and obviously disordered.

Unqualified - Did not maintain radar/B* logs and records of flight.


l l. Fireofunknownorigin

Qualified - Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of duties, equipment and circuit breaker location. Demonstrated proper use of fire extinguishers, oxygen bottles, and similar equipment. Promptly investigated and reported situation to TAC/EWO.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from items required for Qualified.

Unqualifted - Demonstrated improper use of emergency equipment that could have resulted in personal injury or death either to himself or other crewmembers. Significant lack of knowledge of required duties.

*2. Ditching


Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from items required for Qualified.


Unqualified - Stations not fully rigged for ditching. Loose gear or gear adrift. Lacked signiti- cant knowledge of responsibilities.

*3. Bailout


Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations from the items required for Qualified.

Unqualified - Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lacked knowledge of parachute location or bailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked personal survival items.

l 4. Other emergency procedures

Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of procedures for other emergencies such as smoke/tume removal, APU tire, brake tire, explosive/rapid decompression.



AREA G: LANDEXX’OSTFLIGHT






Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of postflight responsibilities, ensuring all equipment secured. Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and tapes and reported as

ORIGINAL 26-20

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

EPQJ MOD C2W STATION 1 AND 2 OPERATORS NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

Figure 26-4. MOD C3CM Station 1 and2 Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 1 of 2)

N10197

26-21 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-f.3

I, “’ “I ‘, ‘:* ,::::

Asterisk (‘) denotes critical area/subarea

Figure 264. MOD C3CM Station 1 and 2 Operator NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

ORIGINAL 26-22

NAVAIR M-75?AA-1.3

directed. All equipment discrepancies properly logged.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions in securing equipment or logging discrepancies.


26.17 C2W STATION 1 AND 2 OPERATOR NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

‘AREA A: PREFLIGHT

‘1. Flight planning

Qualified - Attended brief as directed and had knowledge of known equipment discrepancies.


Unqualified - Insufficient knowledge of known equipment discrepancies.

2. Knowledge of APU

Qualified - Demonstrated thorough knowledge of APU visual inspection and operational limitations.



*3. Positional preflight

Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge ofpreflight procedures. Properly evaluated results of tests and checks.

Conditionally Qualified - Omissions and deviations from preflight resulting in partial determination of equipment status or did not demonstrate a thorough knowledge of preflight procedures.

Unqualified - No preflight performed or major discrepancies resulting in erroneous determination of equipment status or lacked significant knowledge of NATOPS preflight procedures.


‘4. Personal survival equipment

Qualified - Safety and survival equipment complete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute.Demonstratedathoroughknowledgeof use and location of personal survival equipment.


Unqualified- Equipment not completed or major omissions or deviations noted from preflight.


Qualified-Reportedresultsofequipmentchecks and tests to the TAC/EWO in a timely manner, indicating which equipment is inoperative or operating at reduced efficiency.

Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a complete or timely status report.

‘.Unqualifled - Failed to report equipment status to TACiEWO.

AREA B: PRETAKEOFF

*1.

‘2.

26-23

Knowledge of conditions of flight

Qualified-Demonstrated knowledge and understanding of Battle Condition I and Flight Condi- tions II, III, IV, and V.

Conditionally Qualified-Did not fully understand all the implications of all battle/flight conditions.

Unqualified - Had no knowledge of the battle/ flight conditions or lacked understanding of them.


Qualified - Established KS communications with the flight station prior to engine starts. Dem- onstratedproperprocedures formonitoringengine starts and contact reporting. Complied with safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.


Unqualified-Failed to establish ICS communications or lacked knowledge of procedures for monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts.

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Failed to observe safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.

*3. Preparation for takeoff





1. In-flight equipment checks

Qualified - Initiated checks of assigned equipment immediately when Condition III set.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted.

Unqualified - Failed to check equipment when Condition III was set.



Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give complete status report.

Unqualified - Failed to report results of equipment checks to TAC/EWO.

*AREA D: GENERAL AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT

* 1. Aircraft emergency, safety, and survival equipment

Qualified- Had a detailed knowledge of location and use of fire extinguisher, portable oxygen bottles, first-aid kits, fire ax, water breakers, antiex- posure suits, liferafts, emergency radios, emer- gencybuoy, exit lights, and other equipment ofthis general category.


Unqualified- Demonstrated a significant lack of knowledge or understanding of those items listed above.

*2. Aircraft systems and circuit breaker location

Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of contents and circuit breaker location of the hydraulic service center and the main electrical load center. Had knowledge of circuit breaker and equipment location of the inertial, AHRS, UHF 1 and 2, VHF, VOR 1 and 2, tacan, ADF, marker beacon, IFF, altimeter, autopilot, cabin exhaust fan, and other systems normally energized for minimum crew evaluations.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor deviations from those listed above.

Unqualified-Hadsignificant lackofknowledge of those items listed above.

AREA E: POSITIONAL EQUIPMENT UTILIZATION/KNOWLEDGE

The following descriptions pertain to subareas 1 through 7.

Qualified-Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of equipment operating controls and equipment capabilities and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not understand the function(s) of all operating controls.

Unqualified- Lack of familiarity with equipment that could result in damage to equipment. Signifi- cantly lacked a detailed knowledge of equipment capabilities and limitations or failed to meet the requirements of Conditionally Qualified.



Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of duties, equipment and circuit breaker location. Demonstrated proper use of fire extinguisher, oxy-


ORIGINAL 26-24

gen bottles, and similar equipment. Promptly investigated and reported situation to TACYEWO.


Unqualified - Demonstrated improper use of emergency equipment that could have resulted in personal injury or death either to himself or other crewmembers. Significant lack of knowledge of required duties.

‘2. Ditching

‘3.

‘4.



Unqualified - Station not fully rigged for ditching. Loose gear adrift. Lacked significant knowledge of responsibilities.

Bailout



Unqualified-Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lackedknowledgeofparachutelocationorbailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked essential personal survival items.

Other emergency procedures

Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of procedures for other emergencies such as smoke/fume removal, APU tire, brake tire, explosive/rapid decompression.


Unqualified - Lacked a significant amount of knowledge of emergency procedures.

NAVAIR 6%75PAA-I.3

AREA G: LANDING AND POSTFLIGHT





2. Postflight duties

Qualified - All equipment secured at C3CM-1 and C3CM-2 stations. Attended mission debriefing with appropriate logs and reported as directed. All equipment discrepancies properly logged.

Conditionally Qualitied- Minor omissions in securing equipment or logging discrepancies.

Unqualified - Failed to secure any equipment. Failed to log all equipment discrepancies at the stations. Major deviations from the items required for Qualified.

26.16 IN-FLIGHT TECHNICIAN NATOPS EVALUATION GRADING CRITERIA

*AREA A: PREFLIGHT

*I. Flight planning

Qualified - Had knowledge of known equipment discrepancies. Applicable test equipment, publications, toolbox, and in-flight maintenance kit on board aircraft.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor omissions noted, such as incomplete toolbox or publications.

Unqualified - No test equipment or publications or toolbox on board the aircraft. Insufficient knowledge of known equipment discrepancies.

2. Knowledge of APU


26-25 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR OI-75PAA-I.3

EPJJ MOD INFL.IGHT TECHNICIAN NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET cam lxx

Asterisk (7 denoles critical area/subarea

Figure 26-5. In-Flight Technician NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 1 of 2)

N10/97

ORIGINAL 26-26

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

EP-3J MOD INFLIGHT TECHNICIAN NATOPS EVALUATION WORKSHEET

N10197

Figure 26-S. In-Flight Technician NATOPS Evaluation Worksheet (Sheet 2 of 2)

26-27 ORIGINAL

*3.

*4.

Qualified-Demonstratedthoroughknowledge ofAPUvisual inspectionandoperationalhmita- tions.



Positional preflight

Qualified - Performed a complete visual inspection of all bays, racks and equipment for installation and security. Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of preflight procedures. Prepared to repair or replace any malfunctioning electronic equipment.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations or omissions noted from procedures outlined above.

Unqualified-No visual inspection performed or lacked significant knowledge of preflight procedures.

Personal survival equipment

Qualified - Safety and survival equipment complete. Performed a complete and thorough preflight of flotation assembly, survival vest, and parachute. Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of location and utilization of personal survival equipment.


Unqualified-Equipment notcompletedormajor omissions or deviations noted from Qualified.

5. Equipment status report (to TAC/EWO)

Qualified-Reportedresultsofequipmentchecks and tests to the TAC/EWO in a timely manner, indicating which equipment is inoperative or operating at reduced effectiveness.

Conditionally Qualified - Failed to give a complete or timely status report

Unqualified - Failed to report equipment status to TACYEWO.

AREA B: PRETAKEOFF

*1.

‘2.

‘3.

Knowledge of conditions of flight

Qualified-Demonstrated knowledge and understanding of Battle Condition I and Flight Condi- tions II, III, IV, and V.

Conditionally Qualified - Did not fully understand all the implications of Battle Condition I and/or the flight conditions.

Unqualified - Had no knowledge of the battle condition/flight conditions or lacked understanding of them.


Qualified - Established KS communications with the light station prior to engine starts. Dem- onstratedproperprocedures formonitoringengine starts and contact reporting. Complied with safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.


Unqualified - Failed to establish ICS communications or lacked knowledge of procedures for monitoring engine starts or reporting contacts. Failed to observe safety precautions as outlined in applicable directives.

Preparation for takeoff





* 1. Maintenance procedures


ORIGINAL 26-26

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

Qualified - Performed maintenance procedures in accordance with the applicable manuals. Had a thorough knowledge of operation of the equipment.

Conditionally Qualified - Minor deviations noted.

Unqualified - Deviations that would present a potential safety hazard that could result in injury or death, damage to equipment, or lacked significant knowledge of operation of the test equipment or equipment under test.

AREA D: COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE

(Grading criteria below covers all subareas in this area.)

Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all communication equipment, operating controls, equipment capabilities, and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge ofcommunication equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified-Lacked familiarity with communication equipment, that could result in equipment damage. Significantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipment controls or limitations.

AREA E: NONACOUSTIC EQUIPMENT KNOWL- EDGE


Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all nonacoustic equipment, operating controls, equipment capabilities, and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of nonacoustic equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified- Lacked familiarity with nonacoustic, that could result in equipment damage. Signifi- cantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipment controls or limitations.

AREA F: C3CM EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE


Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge ofall C3CM equipment, operating controls, equip ment capabilities, and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of C3CM equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understand the tbnction of all operating controls.

Unqualified - Lacked familiarity with C3CM, that could result in equipment damage. Signiti- cantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipment controls or limitations.

*2. Aircrat? systems and circuit breaker location

AREA G: NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT KNOWLEDGE


Qualified - Demonstrated a detailed knowledge of all navigation equipment, operating controls, equipment capabilities, and limitations.

Conditionally Qualified - Lacked a detailed knowledge of navigation equipment capabilities and limitations. Did not fully understand the function of all operating controls.

Unqualified - Lacked familiarity with navigation, that could result in equipment damage. Sig- nificantly lacked a detailed knowledge of communication equipment controls or limitations.

*AREA H: EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

*l Fire of unknown origin

Qualified- Demonstrated a thorough knowledge of duties, equipment and circuit breaker location. Demonstrated proper use of tire extinguisher, oxygen bottles, and similar equipment. Promptly investigated and reported situation to TAC/EWO.


Unqualified - Demonstrated improper use of emergency equipment that could have resulted in


26-29 ORIGINAL

NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

personal injury or death either to himself or other crewmembers. Significant lack of knowledge of required duties.

*2. Ditching



Unqualified - Stations not fully rigged for ditching. Loose gear adrift. Lacked significant knowledge of responsibilities.

‘3. Bailout



Unqualified -Unfamiliar with bailout signal(s). Lacked knowledge ofparachute location or bailout exit location. Improperly donned parachute or lacked personal survival items.

*4. Other emergency procedures

Qualified - Had detailed knowledge of procedures for other emergencies such as smoke/fume removal, APU fire, brake fire, explosive/rapid decompression.


Unqualified - Lacked a significant amount of knowledge of emergency proceduies.

AREA I: LANDINGE’OSTFLIGHT

*I. Preparation for landing



Unqualified - Deviations that would present a potential safety hazard that could result in injmy or death.


Qualified-Inventoried tool kit, assisted in securing avionic equipment, and logged equipment discrepancies.

Conditionally Qualified-Minor omissions in securing equipment or logging discrepancies.



ORIGINAL 26.30

NAVAIR 01.75PAA-1.3

PART XI

Performance Data

Contained in P-3A/Et/C NATOPS Flight Manual (NAVAIR Ol-75PAC-1).

Chapter 27 -Performance Data Inlmduction

Chapter 28 -Engine Performance Data

Chapter 29 -Takeoff

Chapter 30 - Approach and Landing

Chapter 3 1 - Climb and Descent

Chapter 32 -Flight Planning

Chapter 33 - Operating Tables


NAVAlR 01.75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 27

Performance Data Introduction

Contained inNAVAIR Ol-7SPAC-1


NAVAIR Ol-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 28

Engine Performance Data


28-l (Reverse Blank)

NAVAIR Ol-?WAA-1.3

CHAPTER 29

Takeoff

Contained in NAVAIR 01-?SPAC-1


NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

CHAPTER 30

Approach and Planning


30-I (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 01.75PAA.1.3

CHAPTER 31

Climb and Descent

31.1 CLIMB CONTROL CHARTS

The charts (Figures 3 l-1 through 3 l-l 2) show climb performance with four, three, and two engines operating at normal rated power. The performance is shown in terms of distance, time, and fuel to climb and provides the airspeed schedule that must be used to realize the performance shown. The weight lines are based on

climbs from sea level at the listed initial climb weights. The curves include allowances for fuel burnout during climb,; that is, a curve labeled 120,000 pounds actnrdly represents tbeperfomrance at a weight equal to 120,000 pounds minus the fuel consumed in reaching the altitude at which the curve is read. Each curve includes corrections that should be used to account for nonstandard air temperature conditions.

31-l

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-1.3

DISTANCE- NAVTICAL MlLES

Figure 31-12. Four-Engine Climb Control - Normal Rated Power Climb Performance - Confgumtion E

ORIGINAL

NAVAIR 0%ZiPAA-1.3

CHAPTER 32

Flight Planning

Contained in NAVAIR 01-‘ISPAC-I

32-l (Roveme Blank)

NAVAIR 0%75PAA-I.3

CHAPTER 33

Operating Tables

33.3 USE OF OPERATING TABLES

The operating tables (Figures 33-l through 33-23) are designed primarily for use in flight to accomplish flight plans developed from material in Chapter 10.

33-l ORIGINAL

PO@ NO.

A

AK-22 intercommunication system ...... 22-l AircraA ...................... Part I

Command and control warfare station (C2Wl andC2W2) ............ l-10

Flight station ................... l-1 In-flight communicator station ........ I-10 Mission equipment configuration ....... l-l Navigatorklectmnic warfare offker

station ................... l-11 Radar operator station ............ l-l 1 Station 8A. .................. l-11 Tactical coordinator/electronic warfare

officerstation ............... l-10 All-weather operation ............. Part VI AN/ALQ-170 position display indicator .... 23-2 AN/ALQ-170(V) system ............ 22-34 AN/ARC-l59 UHF 1 radio system ....... 23-l AN/ARC-182, VHF/UHF system ........ 22-50 AN/ARC-187 SATCOM system

(with secure voice) ............ 22-15 AN/ARC-190(V):

HF radio set .................. 22-8 Operating procedures ............. 22-l 1 System .................... 22-48

ANIOSQ-113(V)l radio countermeasures system ................... 22-20

Auxiliary intercommunicationsystem ..... 22-1

B

Bailout .................... B* radar simulator system

9-4, 12-1 ........... 22-46

c

C2W officers (C2Wl and C2W2) ........ 24-7 C2W station 1 and 2 operator evaluation

grading criteria ............... 26-23 C2Wstationsland2 ............. .22-51 CA-33 AN/ARC-l59 UHF ........... 22-l 1 Climb and descent ............. Chapter 3 1 Climb control charts ............... 31-1 Command and control warfare station

(C2Wl and C2W2) ............. l-10 Communication procedures ......... Part VII Controls, UHF .................. 22-5 1 Currency requirements .............. 6-l

NAVAIR CM-75PAA-I.3

INDEX Page

NO.

D

Ditching. . . . . 12-1

E

Emergency procedures . Part V Emergency turnoff procedures 22-29 Electrical fumes of unknown origin 12-1 Electrical system . . 2-l Electronic warfare oflicer . 244

NATOPS grading criteria 26-l Station . l-11

Equipment, aircraft 1 ‘Chapter 2

F

Flight characteristics Part IV Flight station l-l

Checkride 26-l Systems . . . : Chapter 23

Flightcrew coordination Part IX

H

Hertz converter, 400/60 . . 2-2

I

In-flight communicator NATOPS evaluation grading criteria Station

In-flight technician NATOPS evaluation grading criteria

Indoctrination Inertial navigation unit Intercommunication system, AIC-22 and

auxiliary ICS control

24-10 26-9

‘22-46

26-25 Part II 22-57

22-1

L

LTN-72 intertial navigation system no. 2 (INS 2) 22-26

M

MD-1203KJLT audio modulator . 22-50 Operation . . . . . 22-52 System . . 22-42

Index-1 ORlGlNAL

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

19-l

Page No.

R

Radar operator . 22-54.24-I 1 NATOPS evaluation grading criteria 26-15 Station . . . . l-11

Radio communications . . . . 19-I Requirements, qualification, currency, and

requalification . 6-l RT-llSO/ARC-159 receiver/transmitter . 22-13

Message releasing authority Mission:

Circuit breaker panel Equipment configuration

Mission systems . Overview . . . Power requirements

MT-4658/ARC-159 mount

N

. . . .

. . .

.

. 2-1 l-l

: PanVIII Chapter 21

2-l . . . 22-13

NATOPS evaluation . NATOPS evaluation grading creiteria:

C2W station 1 and 2 operator . In-flight communicator In-flight technician Navigator/electronic warfare officer Radar operator . . , . Tactical coordinator . . . .

NAVlEWO station/station 8A . Navigator . . . .

Station . . Normal procedures

Part X

26-23 26-9

26-25 . 26-6

26-15 . 26-l

22-55 24-4 I-11

. Part III

0

Operating tables, use of . Operating limitations . . .

33-l 1 Chapter 4

P

Performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . Plane commander . . . Pod radiation areas. Position display indicator, AN/ALQ-170 Primary electrical system Procedures, communication

. . Part XI 24-1 3-l

23-2 2-1

Chapter 19

a

Qualification requirements 6-l

Servicing . . Smoke of unknown origin . Station 8A . Stores limitations Systems, aircraft

Chapter 3 12-l

‘l:li,‘22-55 4-l

1 ‘Chapter 2

T

TAC/EWO Station . Tactical coordinator/elctronic warfare

officer NATOPS evaluation grading criteria . .

Tactical crew complement Tactical electronic warfare offtcer Training and qualifications

22-50

26-l 6-1

24-2 ‘Chapter 6

U

UHF controls . . . 22-51 Universal pylon wiring 22-44

V

VHF/UHF system AN/ARC-l82 22-50 VHS VCR equipment 22-39

W

Wing stores control system 22-34 WJ-8718 HF scanning receiver 22-29 Wiring, universal pylon . 22-44

Index-2

NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3

Documents

Transcript of NAVAIR 01-75PAA-1.3